MF910-06
-
CMOS 4 BIT SINGLE CHIP MICROCOMPUTER
S5U1C63000A Manual
(S1C63 Family Assembler Package)
NOTICE
No part of this material may be reproduced or duplicated in any form or by any means without the written permission of Seiko
Epson. Seiko Epson reserves the right to make changes to this material without notice. Seiko Epson does not assume any
liability of any kind arising out of any inaccuracies contained in this material or due to its application or use in any product or
circuit and, further, there is no representation that this material is applicable to products requiring high level reliability, such
as medical products. Moreover, no license to any intellectual property rights is granted by implication or otherwise, and there
is no representation or warranty that anything made in accordance with this material will be free from any patent or copyright
infringement of a third party. This material or portions thereof may contain technology or the subject relating to strategic
products under the control of the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law of Japan and may require an export license from
the Ministry of International Trade and Industry or other approval from another government agency.
MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, Windows 98 and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation, U.S.A.
PC-DOS, PC/AT, PS/2, VGA, EGA and IBM are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation, U.S.A.
NEC PC-9800 Series and NEC are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation.
All other product names mentioned herein are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
© SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION 2001 All rights reserved.
INTRODUCTION
Introduction
This document describes the development procedure from assembling source files to debugging. It also
explains how to use each development tool of the "S1C63 Family Assembler Package" common to all the
models of the S1C63 Family.
Caution
We are not responsible for any problems involving products you have manufactured using packed data
created without the use of the tool contained in this package, or using packed data edited after being
created using the tool contained in this package.
How To Read the Manual
This manual was edited particularly for those who are engaged in program development. Therefore, it
assumes that the reader already possesses the following fundamental knowledge:
• Basic knowledge about assembler language
• Basic knowledge about the general concept of program development by an assembler
• Basic operating methods for Windows®95/98 or Windows NT®4.0
Before installation
See Chapter 1. Chapter 1 describes the composition of this package, and provides a general outline of
each tool.
Installation
Install the tools following the installation procedure described in "setup_e.pdf".
To understand the flow of program development
See the program development flow in Chapter 2.
For coding
See the necessary parts in Chapter 4. Chapter 4 describes the grammar for the assembler language as
well as the assembler functions. Also refer to the following manuals when coding:
S1C63xxx Technical Manual
Covers device specifications, and the operation and control method of the peripheral circuits.
S1C63000 Core CPU Manual
Has the instructions and details the functions and operation of the Core CPU.
For debugging
Chapter 8 gives detailed explanation of the debugger. Sections 8.1 to 8.8 give an overview of the
functions of the debugger. See Section 8.9 for details of the debug commands. Also refer to the follow-
ing manuals to understand operations of the In-Circuit Emulator (ICE) and the Peripheral Circuit
Board S5U1C63xxxP:
S5U1C63000H1 Manual (S1C63 Family In-Circuit Emulator)
Explains the functions and handling methods of the ICE.
S5U1C63xxxP Manual (Peripheral Circuit Board for S1C63xxx)
Covers the functions and handling methods of the peripheral circuit board that provides the
hardware specifications of each model to the ICE.
For details of each tool
Chapters 3 to 8 explain the details of each tool. Refer to it if necessary.
Once familiar with this package
Refer to the listings of instructions and commands contained in Appendices.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
i
INTRODUCTION
Manual Notations
This manual was prepared by following the notation rules detailed below:
(1) Sample screens
The sample screens provided in the manual are all examples of displays under Windows®95/98.
These displays may vary according to the system or fonts used.
(2) Names of each part
The names or designations of the windows, menus and menu commands, buttons, dialog boxes, and
keys are annotated in brackets [ ]. Examples: [Command] window, [File | Exit] menu item ([Exit]
command in [File] menu), [Key Break] button, [q] key, etc.
(3) Names of instructions and commands
The CPU instructions and the debugger commands that can be written in either uppercase or lower-
case characters are annotated in lowercase characters in this manual, except for user-specified sym-
bols.
(4) Notation of numeric values
Numeric values are described as follows:
Decimal numbers:
Hexadecimal numbers: Accompanied by the prefix "0x" (e. g., 0x0110, 0xffff).
Binary numbers: Accompanied by the prefix "0b" (e. g., 0b0001, 0b10).
Not accompanied by any prefix or suffix (e. g., 123, 1000).
However, please note that some sample displays may indicate hexadecimal or binary numbers not
accompanied by any symbol. Moreover, a hexadecimal number may be expressed as xxxxh, or a
binary number as xxxxb, for reasons of convenience of explanation.
(5) Mouse operations
To click:
The operation of pressing the left mouse button once, with the cursor (pointer)
placed in the intended location, is expressed as "to click". The clicking operation of
the right mouse button is expressed as "to right-click".
To double-click: Operations of pressing the left mouse button twice in a row, with the cursor (pointer)
placed in the intended location, are all expressed as "to double-click".
To drag:
The operation of clicking on a file (icon) with the left mouse button and holding it
down while moving the icon to another location on the screen is expressed as "to
drag".
To select:
The operation of selecting a menu command by clicking is expressed as "to select".
(6) Key operations
The operation of pressing a specific key is expressed as "to enter a key" or "to press a key".
A combination of keys using "+", such as [Ctrl]+[C] keys, denotes the operation of pressing the [C] key
while the [Ctrl] key is held down. Sample entries through the keyboard are not indicated in [ ].
Moreover, the operation of pressing the [Enter] key in sample entries is represented by "↵".
In this manual, all the operations that can be executed with the mouse are described only as mouse
operations. For operating procedures executed through the keyboard, refer to the Windows manual or
help screens.
(7) General forms of commands, startup options, and messages
Items given in [ ] are those to be selected by the user, and they will work without any key entry
involved.
An annotation enclosed in < > indicates that a specific name should be placed here. For example, <file
name> needs to be replaced with an actual file name.
Items enclosed in { } and separated with | indicate that you should choose an item. For example, {A |
B} needs to have either A or B selected.
(8) Development tool name
ICE: Indicates S5U1C63000H1 (S1C63 Family In-Circuit Emulator).
ii
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CONTENTS
Contents
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL ................................................................................................ 1
1.1 Features ......................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Tool Composition .......................................................................................... 2
1.2.1 Composition of Package.............................................................................. 2
1.2.2 Outline of Software Tools ............................................................................ 2
1.3 Working Environment .................................................................................... 3
1.4 Installation .................................................................................................... 4
1.5 Directories and Files after Installation ......................................................... 4
CHAPTER 2 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PROCEDURE .................................................... 6
2.1 Software Development Flow ......................................................................... 6
2.2 Development Using Work Bench ................................................................... 7
2.2.1 Starting Up the Work Bench ........................................................................ 7
2.2.2 Creating a New Project ............................................................................... 8
2.2.3 Editing Source Files .................................................................................... 8
2.2.4 Configuration of Tool Options ................................................................... 10
2.2.5 Building an Executable Object .................................................................. 11
2.2.6 Debugging .................................................................................................. 12
CHAPTER 3 WORK BENCH ......................................................................................... 13
3.1 Features ........................................................................................................ 13
3.2 Starting Up and Terminating the Work Bench.............................................. 13
3.3 Work Bench Windows ................................................................................... 14
3.3.1 Window Configuration ............................................................................... 14
3.3.2 Window Manipulation ................................................................................ 15
3.4 Toolbar and Buttons ..................................................................................... 19
3.4.1 Standard Toolbar........................................................................................ 19
3.4.2 Build Toolbar ............................................................................................. 20
3.4.3 Window Toolbar ......................................................................................... 20
3.4.4 Toolbar Manipulation ................................................................................ 21
3.4.5 [Insert into project] Button on a [Edit] Window........................................ 21
3.5 Menus ........................................................................................................... 22
3.5.1 [File] Menu ................................................................................................ 22
3.5.2 [Edit] Menu................................................................................................ 23
3.5.3 [View] Menu............................................................................................... 23
3.5.4 [Insert] Menu ............................................................................................. 24
3.5.5 [Build] Menu.............................................................................................. 24
3.5.6 [Tools] Menu .............................................................................................. 25
3.5.7 [Window] Menu ......................................................................................... 25
3.5.8 [Help] Menu .............................................................................................. 25
3.6 Project and Work Space ............................................................................... 26
3.6.1 Creating a New Project .............................................................................. 26
3.6.2 Inserting Sources into a Project ................................................................. 27
3.6.3 [Project] Window ....................................................................................... 28
3.6.4 Opening and Closing a Project .................................................................. 28
3.6.5 Files in the Work Space Folder................................................................... 29
3.7 Source Editor ............................................................................................... 30
3.7.1 Creating a New Source or Header File...................................................... 30
3.7.2 Loading and Saving Files .......................................................................... 31
3.7.3 Edit Function ............................................................................................. 32
3.7.4 Tag Jump Function ..................................................................................... 35
3.7.5 Printing ...................................................................................................... 36
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
iii
CONTENTS
3.8 Build Task ..................................................................................................... 36
3.8.1 Preparing a Build Task .............................................................................. 36
3.8.2 Building an Executable Object .................................................................. 36
3.8.3 Debugging .................................................................................................. 37
3.8.4 Executing Other Tools ................................................................................ 38
3.9 Tool Option Settings ..................................................................................... 40
3.9.1 Assembler Options ..................................................................................... 40
3.9.2 Linker Options ........................................................................................... 41
3.9.3 Debugger Options ...................................................................................... 43
3.9.4 HEX Converter Options ............................................................................. 43
3.10 Work Bench Options ..................................................................................... 44
3.11 Short-Cut Key List ........................................................................................ 45
3.12 Error Messages ............................................................................................ 45
3.13 Precautions .................................................................................................. 46
CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER ............................................................................................ 47
4.1 Functions...................................................................................................... 47
4.2 Input/Output Files ........................................................................................ 47
4.2.1 Input File .................................................................................................... 47
4.2.2 Output Files................................................................................................ 48
4.3 Starting Method............................................................................................ 49
4.4 Messages ...................................................................................................... 50
4.5 Grammar of Assembly Source ...................................................................... 51
4.5.1 Statements .................................................................................................. 51
4.5.2 Instructions (Mnemonics and Pseudo-instructions) .................................. 53
4.5.3 Symbols (Labels) ........................................................................................ 54
4.5.4 Comments................................................................................................... 56
4.5.5 Blank Lines ................................................................................................ 56
4.5.6 Register Names .......................................................................................... 57
4.5.7 Numerical Notations .................................................................................. 57
4.5.8 Operators ................................................................................................... 58
4.5.9 Location Counter Symbol "$" .................................................................... 60
4.5.10 Optimization Branch Instructions for Old Preprocessor ......................... 60
4.6 Section Management .................................................................................... 61
4.6.1 Definition of Sections ................................................................................. 61
4.6.2 Absolute and Relocatable Sections ............................................................ 61
4.6.3 Sample Definition of Sections .................................................................... 62
4.7 Assembler Pseudo-Instructions .................................................................... 63
4.7.1 Include Instruction (#include).................................................................... 64
4.7.2 Define Instruction (#define) ....................................................................... 65
4.7.3 Numeric Define Instruction (#defnum) ...................................................... 67
4.7.4 Macro Instructions (#macro ... #endm)...................................................... 68
4.7.5 Conditional Assembly Instructions
(#ifdef ... #else ... #endif, #ifndef... #else ... #endif) .................................. 70
4.7.6 Section Defining Pseudo-Instructions (.code, .data, .bss) ......................... 72
4.7.7 Location Defining Pseudo-Instructions (.org, .align) ................................ 74
4.7.8 Absolute Assembling Pseudo-Instruction (.abs) ........................................ 77
4.7.9 Symbol Defining Pseudo-Instruction (.set) ................................................ 78
4.7.10 Data Defining Pseudo-Instructions (.codeword, .word) .......................... 79
4.7.11 Area Securing Pseudo-Instructions (.comm, .lcomm).............................. 80
4.7.12 Global Declaration Pseudo-Instruction (.global).................................... 81
4.7.13 List Control Pseudo-Instructions (.list, .nolist)........................................ 81
4.7.14 Source Debugging Information Pseudo-Instructions (.stabs, .stabn) ...... 81
4.7.15 Comment Adding Function ...................................................................... 82
4.7.16 Priority of Pseudo-Instructions................................................................ 82
iv
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CONTENTS
4.8 Relocatable List File .................................................................................... 83
4.9 Sample Executions ....................................................................................... 84
4.10 Error/Warning Messages.............................................................................. 87
4.10.1 Errors ....................................................................................................... 87
4.10.2 Warning .................................................................................................... 88
4.11 Precautions .................................................................................................. 88
CHAPTER 5 LINKER .................................................................................................. 89
5.1 Functions...................................................................................................... 89
5.2 Input/Output Files ........................................................................................ 89
5.2.1 Input Files .................................................................................................. 89
5.2.2 Output Files................................................................................................ 90
5.3 Starting Method............................................................................................ 91
5.4 Messages ...................................................................................................... 94
5.5 Linker Command File................................................................................... 95
5.6 Link Map File ............................................................................................... 96
5.7 Symbol File................................................................................................... 97
5.8 Absolute List File ......................................................................................... 98
5.9 Cross Reference File .................................................................................... 99
5.10 Linking ........................................................................................................ 100
5.11 Branch Optimization Function.................................................................... 102
5.12 Error/Warning Messages............................................................................. 103
5.12.1 Errors ...................................................................................................... 103
5.12.2 Warning ................................................................................................... 103
5.13 Precautions ................................................................................................. 104
CHAPTER 6 HEX CONVERTER ................................................................................... 105
6.1 Functions..................................................................................................... 105
6.2 Input/Output Files ....................................................................................... 105
6.2.1 Input Files ................................................................................................. 105
6.2.2 Output Files............................................................................................... 105
6.3 Starting Method........................................................................................... 106
6.4 Messages ..................................................................................................... 107
6.5 Output Hex Files ......................................................................................... 108
6.5.1 Hex File Configuration ............................................................................. 108
6.5.2 Motorola-S Format.................................................................................... 108
6.5.3 Intel-HEX Format ..................................................................................... 109
6.5.4 Conversion Range ..................................................................................... 109
6.6 Error/Warning Messages............................................................................. 110
6.6.1 Errors ........................................................................................................ 110
6.6.2 Warning ..................................................................................................... 110
6.7 Precautions ................................................................................................. 110
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLER ...................................................................................... 111
7.1 Functions..................................................................................................... 111
7.2 Input/Output Files ....................................................................................... 111
7.2.1 Input Files ................................................................................................. 111
7.2.2 Output Files............................................................................................... 111
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
v
CONTENTS
7.3 Starting Method........................................................................................... 112
7.4 Messages ..................................................................................................... 113
7.5 Disassembling Output ................................................................................. 114
7.6 Error/Warning Messages............................................................................. 117
7.6.1 Errors ........................................................................................................ 117
7.6.2 Warning ..................................................................................................... 117
CHAPTER 8 DEBUGGER ............................................................................................ 118
8.1 Features ....................................................................................................... 118
8.2 Input/Output Files ....................................................................................... 118
8.2.1 Input Files ................................................................................................. 118
8.2.2 Output Files............................................................................................... 119
8.3 Starting Method........................................................................................... 120
8.3.1 Start-up Format ......................................................................................... 120
8.3.2 Start-up Options ........................................................................................ 120
8.3.3 Start-up Messages ..................................................................................... 121
8.3.4 Hardware Check at Start-up ..................................................................... 121
8.3.5 Method of Termination .............................................................................. 123
8.4 Windows ...................................................................................................... 124
8.4.1 Basic Structure of Window ........................................................................ 124
8.4.2 [Command] Window ................................................................................. 126
8.4.3 [Source] Window ....................................................................................... 127
8.4.4 [Data] Window .......................................................................................... 129
8.4.5 [Register] Window .................................................................................... 129
8.4.6 [Trace] Window......................................................................................... 130
8.5 Tool Bar ....................................................................................................... 131
8.5.1 Tool Bar Structure ..................................................................................... 131
8.5.2 [Key Break] Button ................................................................................... 131
8.5.3 [Load File] and [Load Option] Buttons ................................................... 131
8.5.4 [Source], [Mix], and [Unassemble] Buttons ............................................ 131
8.5.5 [Go], [Go to Cursor], [Go from Reset], [Step], [Next],
and [Reset] Buttons .................................................................................. 131
8.5.6 [Break] Button .......................................................................................... 132
8.5.7 [Help] Button ............................................................................................ 132
8.6 Menu............................................................................................................ 133
8.6.1 Menu Structure .......................................................................................... 133
8.6.2 [File] Menu ............................................................................................... 133
8.6.3 [Run] Menu ............................................................................................... 133
8.6.4 [Break] Menu ............................................................................................ 134
8.6.5 [Trace] Menu ............................................................................................ 134
8.6.6 [View] Menu.............................................................................................. 135
8.6.7 [Option] Menu .......................................................................................... 135
8.6.8 [Windows] Menu ....................................................................................... 135
8.6.9 [Help] Menu ............................................................................................. 135
8.7 Method for Executing Commands ............................................................... 136
8.7.1 Entering Commands from Keyboard ......................................................... 136
8.7.2 Executing from Menu or Tool Bar............................................................. 138
8.7.3 Executing from a Command File .............................................................. 139
8.7.4 Log File ..................................................................................................... 140
8.8 Debug Functions ......................................................................................... 141
8.8.1 Loading Program and Data Files ............................................................. 141
8.8.2 Source Display and Symbolic Debugging Function ................................. 142
8.8.3 Displaying and Modifying Program, Data, Option Data and Register .... 144
8.8.4 Executing Program ................................................................................... 146
8.8.5 Break Functions ........................................................................................ 149
vi
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CONTENTS
8.8.6 Trace Functions......................................................................................... 152
8.8.7 Operation of Flash Memory...................................................................... 155
8.8.8 Coverage ................................................................................................... 156
8.8.9 Writing Data to the FPGA on the Standard Peripheral Circuit Board ..... 156
8.9 Command Reference ................................................................................... 157
8.9.1 Command List ........................................................................................... 157
8.9.2 Reference for Each Command .................................................................. 158
8.9.3 Program Memory Operation..................................................................... 159
a / as (assemble mnemonic)......................................................... 159
pe (program memory enter) ......................................................... 161
pf (program memory fill) ............................................................. 162
pm (program memory move)........................................................ 163
8.9.4 Data Memory Operation ........................................................................... 164
dd (data memory dump)............................................................... 164
de (data memory enter) ............................................................... 166
df (data memory fill) .................................................................... 168
dm (data memory move) .............................................................. 169
dw (data memory watch) .............................................................. 170
8.9.5 Command to Display Option Information ................................................ 172
od (option data dump) ................................................................. 172
8.9.6 Register Operation .................................................................................... 174
rd (register display) ..................................................................... 174
rs (register set) ............................................................................. 175
8.9.7 Program Execution ................................................................................... 177
g (go) ......................................................................................... 177
gr (go after reset CPU) ................................................................ 179
s (step) ......................................................................................... 180
n (next) ......................................................................................... 182
8.9.8 CPU Reset ................................................................................................. 183
rst (reset CPU)............................................................................. 183
8.9.9 Break ......................................................................................................... 184
bp (break point set) ...................................................................... 184
bc / bpc (break point clear) ......................................................... 186
bd (data break) ............................................................................ 187
bdc (data break clear) ................................................................. 189
br (register break) ........................................................................ 190
brc (register break clear) ............................................................. 192
bs (sequential break) ................................................................... 193
bsc (sequential break clear) ........................................................ 195
bsp (break stack pointer) ............................................................. 196
bl (break point list) ...................................................................... 198
bac (break all clear) .................................................................... 199
8.9.10 Program Display ..................................................................................... 200
u (unassemble) ............................................................................. 200
sc (source code) ........................................................................... 202
m (mix) ......................................................................................... 204
8.9.11 Symbol Information................................................................................. 206
sy (symbol list) ............................................................................. 206
8.9.12 Load File ................................................................................................. 207
lf (load file) .................................................................................. 207
lo (load option) ............................................................................ 208
8.9.13 Flash Memory Operation........................................................................ 209
lfl (load from flash memory) ........................................................ 209
sfl (save to flash memory) ............................................................ 211
efl (erase flash memory) .............................................................. 213
8.9.14 Trace........................................................................................................ 214
tm (trace mode display/set) ......................................................... 214
td (trace data display) ................................................................. 216
ts (trace search) ........................................................................... 219
tf (trace file) ................................................................................. 221
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
vii
CONTENTS
8.9.15 Coverage ................................................................................................. 222
cv (coverage) ............................................................................... 222
cvc (coverage clear) .................................................................... 223
8.9.16 Command File ......................................................................................... 224
com (execute command file) ........................................................ 224
cmw (execute command file with wait) ........................................ 225
rec (record commands to a file) ................................................... 226
8.9.17 log ........................................................................................................... 227
log (log) ....................................................................................... 227
8.9.18 Map Information ..................................................................................... 228
ma (map information) .................................................................. 228
8.9.19 Mode Setting ........................................................................................... 229
md (mode) .................................................................................... 229
8.9.20 FPGA Operation ..................................................................................... 232
xfer/xfers (xilinx fpga data erase)................................................ 232
xfwr/xfwrs (xilinx fpga data write) .............................................. 233
xfcp/xfcps (xilinx fpga data compare) ......................................... 234
xdp/xdps (xilinx fpga data dump) ................................................ 235
8.9.21 Quit ......................................................................................................... 236
q (quit) ......................................................................................... 236
8.9.22 Help ......................................................................................................... 237
? (help)......................................................................................... 237
8.10 Status/Error/Warning Messages ................................................................... 238
CHAPTER 9 FUNCTION OPTION GENERATOR .............................................................. 240
9.1 Outline of the Function Option Generator winfog...................................... 240
9.2 Input/output Files ........................................................................................ 240
9.3 Using winfog ............................................................................................... 241
9.3.1 Starting Up ................................................................................................ 241
9.3.2 Window ...................................................................................................... 242
9.3.3 Menus and Toolbar Buttons ...................................................................... 243
9.3.4 Operation Procedure................................................................................. 244
9.4 Error Messages ........................................................................................... 247
9.5 Example Output Files .................................................................................. 248
CHAPTER 10 SEGMENT OPTION GENERATOR .............................................................. 249
10.1 Outline of Segment Option Generator winsog ............................................ 249
10.2 Input/output Files ........................................................................................ 249
10.3 Using winsog ............................................................................................... 250
10.3.1 Starting Up .............................................................................................. 250
10.3.2 Window .................................................................................................... 252
10.3.3 Menus and Toolbar Buttons .................................................................... 253
10.3.4 Option Selection Buttons ........................................................................ 254
10.3.5 Operation Procedure............................................................................... 254
10.4 Error Messages ........................................................................................... 260
10.5 Example Output Files .................................................................................. 261
CHAPTER 11 MELODY ASSEMBLER ............................................................................ 262
11.1 Outline of the Melody Assembler winmla ................................................... 262
11.2 Input/output Files ........................................................................................ 262
viii
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CONTENTS
11.3 Using winmla .............................................................................................. 263
11.3.1 Starting Up .............................................................................................. 263
11.3.2 Window .................................................................................................... 264
11.3.3 Menus and Toolbar Buttons .................................................................... 265
11.3.4 Operation Procedure............................................................................... 266
11.4 Melody Data................................................................................................ 269
11.4.1 Outline of Melody Data .......................................................................... 269
11.4.2 Melody Data Creation Procedure ........................................................... 269
11.4.3 Method of Creating Melody Data ........................................................... 270
11.4.4 Description of Melody Data.................................................................... 271
11.4.5 Precautions ............................................................................................. 274
11.5 Error Messages ........................................................................................... 275
11.6 Error Symbols ............................................................................................. 276
11.7 Sample Files ................................................................................................ 277
CHAPTER 12 MASK DATA CHECKER .......................................................................... 281
12.1 Outline of the Mask Data Checker winmdc ................................................ 281
12.2 Input/Output Files ....................................................................................... 281
12.3 Using winmdc.............................................................................................. 282
12.3.1 Starting Up .............................................................................................. 282
12.3.2 Menus and Toolbar Buttons .................................................................... 283
12.3.3 Operation Procedure............................................................................... 284
12.4 Error Messages ........................................................................................... 287
12.5 Example Output File ................................................................................... 288
APPENDIX
QUICK REFERENCE
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
ix
CHAPTER 1: GENERAL
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL
1.1 Features
The S1C63 Family Assembler Package contains software development tools that are common to all the
models of the S1C63 Family. The package comes as an efficient working environment for development
tasks, ranging from source program assembly to debugging.
Its principal features are as follows:
Simple composition
A task from assembly to debugging can be made with minimal tools.
Integrated working environment
A Windows-based integrated environment allows the tool chain to be used on its Windows GUI
interface <Workbench wb63>.
Modular programming
The relocatable assembler lets you develop a program which is made up of multiple sources. This
makes it possible to keep a common part independently and to use it as a part or a basis for the next
program.
Source debugging
A debugger can display an assembler source to show its execution status and allow debugging
operations on it. This makes debugging much easier to perform.
Common to all S1C63 chips
The tools included in this package are common to all S1C63 Family models except for several chip
dependent masking tools ("Dev" tools). The chip dependent information is read from the ICE param-
eter file for each chip.
Complete compatibility with old syntax sources
By supporting old syntax, existing sources written for old 63 tools are available with these new tools.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
1
CHAPTER 1: GENERAL
1.2 Tool Composition
1.2.1 Composition of Package
The S1C63 Family Assembler Package contains the items listed below. When it is unpacked, make sure
that all items are supplied.
1) CD-ROM (Tools and PDF manuals are included) .................. One
2) Warranty card ......................................................................... One each in English and Japanese
3) Registration card .................................................................... One each in English and Japanese
1.2.2 Outline of Software Tools
The following shows the outlines of the software tools included in the package:
Assembler (as63.exe)
Converts the mnemonic of the source files into object codes (machine language) of the S1C63000. The
results are output in a relocatable object file. This assembler includes preprocessing functions such as
macro definition/call, conditional assembly, and file-include functions.
Linker (lk63.exe)
Links the relocatable objects created by the assembler by fixing the memory locations, and creates
executable absolute object codes. The linker also provides an auto EXT insertion/correction function
allowing the programmer to create sources without having to know branch destination ranges.
Hex converter (hx63.exe)
Converts an absolute object in IEEE-695 format output from the linker into ROM-image data in
Motorola-S format or Intel-HEX format. This conversion is needed when making the ROM or when
creating mask data using the mask data checker.
Disassembler (ds63.exe)
Disassembles an absolute object file in IEEE-695 format or a hex file in Motorola-S format, and restores
it to a source format file. The restored source file can be processed in the assembler/linker/hex
converter to obtain the same object or hex file.
Debugger (db63.exe)
This software performs debugging by controlling the ICE hardware tool. Commands that are used
frequently, such as break and step, are registered on the tool bar, minimizing the necessary keyboard
operations. Moreover, sources, registers, and command execution results can be displayed in multiple
windows, with resultant increased efficiency in the debugging tasks.
Work Bench (wb63.exe)
This software provides an integrated development environment with Windows GUI. Creating/
editing source files, selecting files and major start-up options, and the start-up of each tool can be
made with simple Windows operations.
2
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 1: GENERAL
The tools listed below are Windows GUI applications for creating mask data. A device information
definition file (s1c63xxx.ini) is required to run these tools. The CD-ROM contains the device information
definition files for the models supported with the following tools. For unsupported models, model
specific Development Tools are provided.
Function option generator (winfog.exe)
This tool creates an ICE function option setup file after selecting the mask options of the S1C63xxx
and the function option document file that is necessary to generate IC mask patterns. You can create
function option data by selecting the appropriate item using the check boxes.
Segment option generator (winsog.exe)
This tool creates an ICE segment option setup file after selecting the segment options of the S1C63xxx
and the segment option document file that is necessary to generate IC mask patterns. You can create
segment assignment data by merely clicking on the display memory map and segment decode table
shown on the window. The winsog is used only for the model that has segment options.
Melody assembler (winmla.exe)
This tool converts the melody data created using an editor into the melody ROM and melody option
data for the S1C63xxx melody generator. The winmla is used only for the model with a melody output
function.
Mask data checker (winmdc.exe)
This tool checks the data in development-completed program ROM/data ROM files and option
document files to create the mask data file that will be presented to Seiko Epson.
1.3 Working Environment
To use the S1C63 Family Assembler Package, the following conditions are necessary:
Personal computer
An IBM PC/AT or a compatible machine which is equipped with a CPU equal to or better than a
Pentium 75 MHz, and 32MB or more of memory is recommended.
To use the optional In-Circuit Emulator ICE, the personal computer also requires a serial port (with a
D-sub 9 pin).
Display
A display unit capable of displaying 800 × 600 dots or more is necessary.
Hard disk and CD-ROM drive
Since the installation is done from a CD-ROM to a hard disk, a CD-ROM drive and a hard disk drive
are required.
Mouse
A mouse is necessary to operate the tools.
System software
The S1C63 Family Assembler Package supports Microsoft® Windows®95 (English or Japanese),
Windows®98 (English or Japanese) and Windows NT®4.0 (English or Japanese).
Other development tools
To debug the target program, the optional In-Circuit Emulator and a Peripheral Circuit Board
S5U1C63xxxP are needed as the hardware tools.
The S5U1C63xxxP board is prepared for each S1C63 model.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
3
CHAPTER 1: GENERAL
1.4 Installation
The supplied CD-ROM contains the installer (Setup.exe) that installs the tools.
To install the tools, start up the "Setup.exe" and follow the instructions in the dialog boxes that will be
appeared. For more information on the installation procedure, please refer to "setup_e.pdf" on the CD-
ROM.
1.5 Directories and Files after Installation
The installer copies the following files in the specified directory (default is "C:\EPSON\S1C63\"):
[EPSON\S1C63]
README_E.TXT
README_J.TXT
... ReadMe document (English)
... ReadMe document (Japanese)
[\BIN]
... S1C63 Family Assembler Package Tool
... Work bench
... Assembler
WB63.EXE
AS63.EXE
LK63.EXE
HX63.EXE
DS63.EXE
DB63.EXE
S1C63.CNT
S1C63.HLP
. . .
... Linker
... Hex converter
... Disassembler
... Debugger
... Help index
... Help contents
... Other related files
[\DEV]
[\BIN]
... S1C63 Family Development Tool for Windows
... Function option generator
... Segment option generator
... Melody assembler
WINFOG.EXE
WINSOG.EXE
WINMLA.EXE
WINMDC.EXE
... Mask data checker
[\63xxx]
... Model-dependent files
S1C63xxx.INI
PAR63xxx.PAR
C63xxx.FSA
C63xxx.SSA
... Device information definition file
... Parameter file
... Sample function option HEX file (for ICE configuration)
... Sample segment option HEX file (for ICE configuration)
:
[\WRITER]
[\6xxxx] ( \6Pxxx or \6Fxxx)
[\URW2]
US6xxxx.EXE
... ROM Writer II control software (English)
... ROM Writer II control software (Japanese)
... Firmware
JP6xxxx.EXE
6xxxx.FRM
. . .
... Other related files
:
∗ Refer to the technical manual for details of the ROM Writer II.
[\ICE]
[\ICE63UPD]
TM63.EXE
ICE63.COM
I63COM.O
I63.PAR
... ICE firmware updater to support standard peripheral circuit board
... FPGA data to configure standard peripheral circuit board
[\FPGA]
C63xxx.MOT
:
4
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 1: GENERAL
[\DOC]
[\ENGLISH]
REL_xxxx_E.TXT
... Document folder (English)
... Tool release note
MANUAL_E.PDF ... This manual in PDF format
QUICK_E.PDF
... Quick reference in PDF format
[\HARD]
xxxx_E.PDF
... Hardware development tool manuals in PDF format
[\JAPANESE]
... Document folder (Japanese)
... Tool release note
... This manual in PDF format
... Quick reference in PDF format
REL_xxxx_J.TXT
MANUAL_J.PDF
QUICK_J.PDF
[\HARD]
xxxx_J.PDF
... Hardware development tool manuals in PDF format
Online manual in PDF format
The online manuals are provided in PDF format, so Adobe Acrobat Reader Ver. 4.0 or later is needed
to read it.
Files for future release models
The files for future release models may be provided in FDs. Refer to the Readme file included in the
FD for installation.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
5
CHAPTER 2: SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PROCEDURE
CHAPTER 2 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PROCEDURE
This chapter outlines a basic development procedure.
2.1 Software Development Flow
Figure 2.1.1 represents a flow of software development work.
Work Bench
wb63
Assembly
source file(s)
S1C63xxx Development Tool
file.S
file.MS
file.MAK
Make
file
or
file.par
file.ini
Assembler
Function Option
Generator winfog
as63
Assembly
list file(s)
file.LST
file.CM
file.O
file.MS
file.FSA
file.FDC
Object
file(s)
Function option Function option
Preprocessed
source file(s)
Linker
command file
HEX file document file
Segment Option
Generator winsog
Linker
lk63
Absolute
list file
file.SSA
file.SDC
file.ABS
Symbol file file.SYM
Link map file file.MAP
file.ALS
file.XRF
Absolute
object file
Segment option Segment option
Cross
reference
file
HEX file
document file
file.MDT
Melody
data file
HEX converter
hx63
Melody Assembler
winmla
Intel-HEX
Motorola-S
format files
format files
file.MSA
file.MDC
fileH.HEX
fileL.HEX
fileC.HEX
file.HSA
or
file.LSA
Melody ROM Melody ROM option
option HEX file document file
file.CSA
Mask Data Checker
Disassembler
ds63
winmdc
Mask
data file
file.PAn
file.MS
Disassembled
source file
SEIKO EPSON
Debugger
db63
In-Circuit Emulator
Fig. 2.1.1 Software development flow
The work bench provides an integrated development environment from source editing to debugging.
Tools such as the assembler and linker can be invoked from the work bench. The tools can also be in-
voked individually from the DOS prompt.
Refer to the respective chapter for details of each tool.
Some models provide other development tools (fog63xxx, sog63xxx, etc.) instead of the "S1C63xxx
Development Tool" shown above. Those model dependent tools are not covered in this manual. For
details, refer to the tool manual associated with each specific model.
6
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 2: SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PROCEDURE
2.2 Development Using Work Bench
This section shows a basic development procedure using the work bench wb63.
Refer to Chapter 3, "Work Bench", for operation details.
2.2.1 Starting Up the Work Bench
Start up the work bench by choosing "WorkBench63" from the program menu.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
7
CHAPTER 2: SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PROCEDURE
2.2.2 Creating a New Project
The work bench manages necessary file and tool setting information as a project.
First a new project file should be created.
1. Select [New] from the [File] menu (or click the [New] button).
[New] button
The [New] dialog box appears.
2. Select [EPSON Project File] and click [OK].
The [Project] dialog box appears.
3. Enter a project name, select an ICE parameter file and select a
directory, then click [OK].
∗ The [ICE parameter file:] box lists the parameter files that exist
in the "dev63" directory.
The work bench creates a folder (directory) with the specified
project name as a work space, and puts the project file (.epj) into
the folder.
The specified project name will also be used for the absolute object
and other files.
Created project
[Project] window
2.2.3 Editing Source Files
The work bench has an editor function. This makes it possible to edit source files without another editor.
To create a new source file:
1. Select [New] from the [File] menu (or click the [New] button).
[New] button
The [New] dialog box appears.
2. Select [EPSON Assembly Source File] and click [OK].
8
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 2: SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PROCEDURE
A new edit window appears.
[Edit] window
3. Enter source codes in the [Edit] window.
4. Save the source in a file by selecting [Save] from the [File] menu (or clicking the [Save] button).
[Save] button
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
9
CHAPTER 2: SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PROCEDURE
5. Click the [Insert into project] button on the [Edit] window.
[Insert into project] button
The created source file is added in the project.
To add existing source files, use [Files into project...] in the [Insert] menu. It can also be done by dragging
source files from Windows Explorer to the project window.
Create necessary source files and add them into the project.
Sample list in the [Project] window
The added source files are listed in the project window. Double-clicking a listed source file name opens
the edit window.
2.2.4 Configuration of Tool Options
The work bench supports all the start up options of each tool and they can be selected in a dialog box. A
make process for generating an executable object will be configured based on the settings.
In addition to option selection, command files for the linker and debugger can be configured here.
To set tool options:
1. Select [Setting...] from the [Build] menu.
A dialog box appears.
2. Configure options if necessary.
Check box items can be selected by clicking. Items in the list can be toggled or entered by double-
clicking.
Refer to Chapter 3, "Work Bench", for details of the [Settings] dialog box.
10
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 2: SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PROCEDURE
2.2.5 Building an Executable Object
To make an executable object file:
1. Select [Build] from the [Build] menu (or click the [Build] button).
[Build] button
This will invoke the assembler and linker to create an executable object file. If a HEX file format (Intel
HEX or Motorola S) is selected by the [Output format] box, the HEX converter will be invoked after
linking. By default, an absolute object file in IEEE-695 format will be created.
[Output format] box
Messages delivered from each executed tool are displayed in the [Output] window. The work bench has a
tag-jump function that jumps to the source line in which an error has occurred by double-clicking a
source syntax error message that appears in the [Output] window. It opens the corresponding source
window if it is closed.
Linked with the corresponding source line
[Output] window
In the build task, a general make process is executed to update the least necessary files. To rebuild all the
files without the make function, select [Rebuild All] from the [Build] menu (or click the [Rebuild All]
button).
[Rebuild All] button
To invoke the assembler only to correct syntax errors, select [Assemble] in the [Built] menu (or click the
[Assemble] button).
[Assemble] button
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
11
CHAPTER 2: SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PROCEDURE
2.2.6 Debugging
To debug the executable object:
1. Select [Debug] from the [Build] menu (or click the [Debug] button).
[Debug] button
The debugger starts up with the specified ICE parameter file and then loads the executable object file.
Note: Make sure that the ICE is ready to debug before invoking the debugger. Refer to the ICE hardware
manual for settings and startup method of the ICE.
For the debugging functions and operations, refer to Chapter 8, "Debugger".
12
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
CHAPTER 3 WORK BENCH
This chapter describes the functions and operating method of the Work Bench wb63.
3.1 Features
The Work Bench wb63 provides an integrated operating environment ranging from editing source files to
debugging. Its functions and features are summarized below:
• Source edit function that supports copy/paste, find/replace, print, label jump and tag jump from error
messages.
• Allows simple management of all necessary files and information as a project.
• General make process to invoke necessary tools and to update the least necessary files.
• Supports all options of the assembler, linker, HEX converter, disassembler and debugger.
• Windows GUI interface for simple operation.
3.2 Starting Up and Terminating the Work Bench
To start up the work bench
Choose "WorkBench63" from the [Program] menu to start
up the work bench.
∗ If "WorkBench63" is not registered in the [Program]
menu, it means that the installation was not successful.
Therefore, reinstall the tools .
When the work bench starts up, the window shown below
appears.
To terminate the work bench
Select [Exit] from the [File] menu.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
13
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
3.3 Work Bench Windows
3.3.1 Window Configuration
Menu bar
Toolbar
[Edit] window
[Project] window
[Output] window
Status bar
The work bench has three types of windows: [Edit] window, [Project] window and [Output] window.
[Edit] window
This window is used for editing a source file. A standard text file can also be displayed in this win-
dow. Two or more windows can be opened in the edit window area.
When an assembly source file is opened, the source is displayed with in colors according to the
contents. The default colors are shown below.
S1C63 instructions:
Black
Preprocess (#) pseudo-instructions: Dark brown
Assemble (.) pseudo-instructions: Blue
Labels:
Comments:
Light brown
Green
These colors can be changed by the [Tools | Options ] menu command (refer to Section 3.10).
[Project] window
This window shows the currently opened work space folder and lists all the source files in the project,
with a structure similar to Windows Explorer.
Double-clicking a source file icon opens the source file in the [Edit] window.
14
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
[Output] window
This window displays the messages delivered from the executed tools in a build or assemble process.
Double-clicking a syntax error message with a source line number displayed in this window activates
or opens the [Edit] window of the corresponding source so that the source line in which the error has
occurred can be viewed.
Menu bar
Refer to Section 3.5.
Toolbar
Refer to Section 3.3.
Status bar
Shows help messages when the mouse cursor is placed on a menu item or a button.
It also indicates the cursor position in the [Edit] window and Key lock status (Num lock, Caps lock,
Scroll lock).
3.3.2 Window Manipulation
Resizing the windows
Each window area can be
resized by dragging the win-
dow boundary. The size
information is saved when the
work bench is terminated. So
the same window layout will
appear at the next time the
work bench starts up.
←| |→
Double click
Floating and docking the
[Project] and [Output]
window
The [Project] window and the
[Output] window can be made
a floating window by double-
clicking the window boundary
and the floating window can be
moved and resized in the work
bench window. The floating
window will be restored to a
docking window by double
clicking the window's title bar
or dragging the title bar
towards an edge of the work
bench window.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
15
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
Closing the [Project] and [Output] window
The [Project] window and the [Output] window can be closed by selecting [Project Window] and
[Output Window] from the [View] menu, respectively. To open them, select the menu items again.
Maximizing the [Edit] window area
The [Edit] window area can be maxi-
mized to the full screen size by selecting
[Full Screen] from the [View] menu. All
other windows and toolbars are hidden
behind the [Edit] window area.
To return it to the normal display, click
the button that appears on the screen.
This button can be moved anywhere in
the screen by dragging its title bar.
Pressing the [ESC] key also returns the
window to the normal display.
Opening/Closing [Edit] windows
An [Edit] window opens when a source file (text file) is loaded using a menu, button or a file icon in
the [Project] window, or when a new source is created.
[Edit] windows close by clicking the [Close] box of each window or selecting [Close] from the [File]
menu.
When a project file is saved, the [Edit] window information (files opened, size and location) is also
saved. So the next time the project opens, editing can begin in the saved condition.
Arrangement of the [Edit] windows
The [Edit] windows being opened can be arranged similar to standard Windows applications.
1
Cascade windows
Select [Cascade] from the [Window] menu or click the [Cascade Windows] button.
[Cascade Windows] button
16
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
2
Tile windows
To tile windows vertically, select [Tile Vertically] from the [Window] menu or click the [Tile Vertically]
button.
[Tile Vertically] button
To tile windows horizontally, select [Tile Horizontally] from the [Window] menu or click the [Tile
Horizontally] button.
[Tile Horizontally] button
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
17
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
3
Maximizing an [Edit] window
Click the [Maximize] button on the window title bar. The window will be maximized to the [Edit]
window area size and other [Edit] windows will be hidden behind the active window.
4
5
Minimizing an [Edit] window
Click the [Minimize] button on the window title bar. The window will be minimized as a window
icon. The minimized icons can be arranged at the bottom of the [Edit] window area by selecting
[Arrange Icons] from the [Window] menu.
Moving and resizing an [Edit] window
The [Edit] window allows changing of its location and its size in the same way as the standard
Windows applications if it is not maximized.
Switching active [Edit] window
Click the window to be activated if it can be viewed. Otherwise, select the window name (source file
name) from the currently-opened window list in the [Window] menu.
Scrolling display contents
A standard scroll bar appears if the display contents exceed the display size of a window. Use it to
scroll the display contents. The arrow keys can also be used.
Showing and hiding the status bar
The status bar can be shown or hidden by selecting [Status Bar] from the [View] menu.
18
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
3.4 Toolbar and Buttons
Tree types of toolbars have been implemented in the work bench: standard toolbar, build toolbar and
window tool bar.
Standard toolbar
Build toolbar
Window toolbar
3.4.1 Standard Toolbar
This toolbar has the following standard buttons:
[New] button
Creates a new document. A dialog box will appear allowing selection from among three document
types: assembly source, assembly header and project.
[Open] button
Opens a document. A dialog box will appear allowing selection of the file to be opened.
[Save] button
Saves the document in the active [Edit] window to the file. The file will be overwritten.
This button becomes inactive if no [Edit] window is opened.
[Save All] button
Saves the documents of all [Edit] windows and the project information to the respective files.
[Cut] button
Cuts the selected text in the [Edit] window to the clipboard.
[Copy] button
Copies the selected text in the [Edit] window to the clipboard.
[Paste] button
Pastes the text copied on the clipboard to the current cursor position in the [Edit] window or
replaces the selected text with the copied text.
[Find] button
Finds the specified word in the active [Edit] window. A dialog box will appear allowing specifica-
tion of the word to be found and a search condition.
[Find Next] button
Finds next target word towards the end of the file.
[Find Previous] button
Finds next target word towards the beginning of the file.
[Print] button
Prints the document in the active [Edit] window. A standard print dialog will appear allowing a
specific print condition.
[Help] button
Displays the help window.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
19
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
3.4.2 Build Toolbar
This tool bar has the following buttons and list boxes used to build a project:
[Assemble] button
Assembles the assembly source in the active [Edit] window. This button becomes active only when
the active [Edit] window shows an assembly source file.
[Build] button
Builds the currently opened project using a general make process.
[Rebuild All] button
Builds the currently opened project. All the source files will be assembled regardless of whether
they are updated or not.
[Stop Build] button
Stops the build process being executed. This button becomes active only while a build process is
being executed.
[ICE Parameter] pull-down list box
Selects the ICE parameter file for the model being developed. In this box, all the
ICE parameter files that exist in the "Dev63" directory are listed.
[Output Format] pull-down list box
Selects an executable object file format. Three types of formats are available:
IEEE-695 absolute object format, Intel HEX format and Motorola S format. The
build process will generate an executable object in the format selected here.
[HEX Convert] button
Invokes the HEX converter to convert an absolute object into an Intel HEX object or a Motorola S
object. A dialog box will appear allowing selection of an absolute object and options of the HEX
converter.
[Disassemble] button
Invokes the disassembler to disassemble an absolute object. A dialog box will appear allowing
selection of an absolute object and options of the disassembler.
[Debug] button
Invokes the debugger with the specified ICE parameter file.
3.4.3 Window Toolbar
This tool bar has the following buttons used in window manipulation:
[Cascade] button
Cascades the opened [Edit] windows.
[Tile Horizontally] button
Tiles the opened [Edit] window horizontally.
[Tile Vertically] button
Tiles the opened [Edit] window vertically.
20
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
3.4.4 Toolbar Manipulation
Hiding and showing toolbars
Each toolbar can be hidden if not needed. Select the toolbar name from the [View] menu. This opera-
tion toggles between hiding and showing the toolbar.
Changing the toolbar location
Toolbars can be moved to another location in the toolbar area by dragging them. If a toolbar is moved
out of the toolbar area, it will be changed to a window.
3.4.5 [Insert into project] Button on a [Edit] Window
[Insert into project] button
When a source file (.s or .ms) is opened, the [Insert into project] button appears on the [Edit] window. It
can be used to insert the source file into the current opened project.
For other file types, the [Edit] window opens without the [Insert into project] button.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
21
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
3.5 Menus
3.5.1 [File] Menu
[New...] ([Ctrl]+[N])
Creates a new document. A dialog box will appear allowing selection
from among three document types: assembly source, assembly header
and project.
[Open...] ([Ctrl]+[O])
Opens a document. A dialog box will appear allowing selection of the
file to be opened.
[Close]
Closes the active [Edit] window. This menu item appears when an
[Edit] window becomes active.
[Open Workspace...]
Opens a project. A dialog box will appear allowing selection of the
project to be opened.
[Close Workspace]
Closes the currently opened project. This menu item becomes inactive
if no project is opened.
[Save] ([Ctrl]+[S])
Saves the document in the active [Edit] window to the file. The file
will be overwritten. This menu item appears when an [Edit] window
becomes active.
The file names listed in this menu
are recently used source and
project files. Selecting one opens
the file.
The number of files to be listed can
be selected by the [Tools | Options]
menu command.
[Save As...]
Saves the document in the active [Edit] window with another file
name. A dialog box will appear allowing specification of a save
location and a file name. This menu item appears when an [Edit]
window becomes active.
[Save All]
Saves the documents of all [Edit] windows and the project information
to the respective files.
[Print...] ([Ctrl]+[P])
Prints the document in the active [Edit] window. A standard [print]
dialog box will appear allowing a specific print condition. This menu
item appears when an [Edit] window becomes active.
[Print Preview]
Displays a print image of the document in the active [Edit] window.
This menu item appears when an [Edit] window becomes active.
[Page Setup...]
Displays a dialog box for selecting paper and printer.
22
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
3.5.2 [Edit] Menu
[Undo] ([Ctrl]+[Z])
Undoes the previous executed operation in the [Edit] window.
[Cut] ([Ctrl]+[X])
Cuts the selected text in the [Edit] window to the clipboard.
[Copy] ([Ctrl]+[C])
Copies the selected text in the [Edit] window to the clipboard.
[Paste] ([Ctrl]+[V])
Pastes the text copied on the clipboard to the current cursor position in the
[Edit] window or replaces the selected text with the copied text.
[Select All] ([Ctrl]+[A])
Selects all text in the active [Edit] window.
[Find...] ([Ctrl]+[F])
Finds the specified word in the active [Edit] window. A dialog box will
appear allowing specification of the word to be found and a search condition.
[Replace] ([Ctrl]+[H])
Replaces the specified words in the active [Edit] window with one another. A
dialog box will appear allowing specification of the words.
[Go To] ([Ctrl]+[G])
Jumps to the specified line or label in the active [Edit] window. A dialog box
will appear allowing specification of a line number or a label name.
3.5.3 [View] Menu
[Standard Bar]
Shows or hides the standard toolbar.
[Status Bar]
Shows or hides the status bar located at the bottom of the work bench
window.
[Output Window]
Opens or closes the [Output] window.
[Project Window]
Opens or closes the [Project] window.
[Build Bar]
Shows or hides the build toolbar.
[Window Bar]
Shows or hides the window toolbar.
[Full Screen]
Maximizes the [Edit] window area to the full screen size.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
23
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
3.5.4 [Insert] Menu
[File...]
Inserts the specified file to the current cursor position in the [Edit]
window or replaces the selected text with the contents of the
specified file. A dialog box will appear allowing selection of the file
to be inserted.
[Files into project...]
Adds the specified source file in the currently opened project. A
dialog box will appear allowing selection of the file to be added.
3.5.5 [Build] Menu
[Assemble] ([Ctrl]+[F7])
Assembles the assembly source in the active [Edit] window. This
menu item becomes active only when the active [Edit] window
shows an assembly source file.
[Build] ([F7])
Builds the currently opened project using a general make process.
[Rebuild All]
Builds the currently opened project. All the source files will be
assembled regardless of whether they are updated or not.
[Stop Build] ([Ctrl]+[Break])
Stops the build process being executed. This button become active
only while a build process is being executed.
[Debug] ([F5])
Invokes the debugger with the specified ICE parameter file.
[Settings...] ([Alt]+[F7])
Displays a dialog box for selecting tool options.
[ICE parameter file...]
Displays a dialog box for selecting an ICE parameter file.
[Output Format...]
Displays a dialog box for selecting an executable object file format.
Three types of formats are available: IEEE-695 absolute object
format, Intel HEX format and Motorola S format. The build process
will generate an executable object in the format selected here.
24
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
3.5.6 [Tools] Menu
[HEX Converter...]
Invokes the HEX converter to convert an absolute object into an Intel HEX object
or Motorola S object. A dialog box will appear allowing selection of an absolute
object and options for the HEX converter.
[Disassembler...]
Invokes the disassembler to disassemble an absolute object. A dialog box will
appear allowing selection of an absolute object and options for the disassembler.
[WinFOG]
Invokes the function option generator winfog.
[WinSOG]
Invokes the segment option generator winsog.
[WinMLA]
Invokes the melody assembler winmla.
[WinMDC]
Invokes the mask data checker winmdc.
[Options...]
Displays a dialog box for selecting work bench options such as character colors
in the [Edit] window and a printing font.
3.5.7 [Window] Menu
This menu appears when an [Edit] window is opened.
[Cascade]
Cascades the opened [Edit] windows.
[Tile Horizontally]
Tiles the opened [Edit] window horizontally.
[Tile Vertically]
Tiles the opened [Edit] window vertically.
[Arrange Icons]
Arranges the minimized [Edit] window icons at the bottom of the [Edit] win-
dow area.
[Close All]
Closes all the [Edit] windows opened.
3.5.8 [Help] Menu
[Help]
Displays the [Help] window.
[About WB63...]
Displays a dialog box showing the version of the work bench.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
25
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
3.6 Project and Work Space
The work bench manages a program development task using a work space folder and a project file that
contains file and other information necessary for invoking the development tools.
3.6.1 Creating a New Project
A new project file can be created by the following procedure:
1. Select [New] from the [File] menu or click the [New] button.
[New] button
The [New] dialog box appears.
2. Select [EPSON Project File] and click [OK].
The [Project] dialog box appears.
3. Enter a project name, select an ICE parameter file and select a directory, then click [OK].
∗ The [ICE parameter file:] box lists the parameter files that exist in the "dev" directory.
The work bench creates a folder (directory) with the specified project name as a work space, and puts the
project file (.epj) into the folder.
If a folder which has the same name as that of a specified one already exists in the specified location, the
work bench uses the folder as the work space. Thus you can specify a folder in which sources are created.
The specified project name will also be used for the absolute object and other files.
26
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
3.6.2 Inserting Sources into a Project
The sources created must be inserted into the project.
To insert a source into a project, use one of the four methods shown below:
1. [Insert | Files into project...] menu item
A dialog box appears when this menu item is selected.
Choose a source file from the list box and then click [Open].
2. [File | Open...] menu item or [Open] button
[Open] button
A dialog box appears when this menu item or button is selected.
Choose a source file from the list box and select the [Into project] button, then click [Open].
3. [Insert into project] button on the [Edit] window
[Insert into project] button
When the source file has been opened, click the [Insert into project] button on the [Edit] window. Do
not forget to save the source to the file before inserting into the project.
4. Dragging source files on the [Project] window
Drag source files from Windows Explorer to the [Project] window. These files will be added to the
current project.
When a source file is inserted into the project, the source file name appears in the [Project] window.
Removing a source from the project
To remove a source file from the project, select the source in the [Project] window and then press the
[Delete] key. This removes only the source information, and does not delete the actual source file.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
27
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
3.6.3 [Project] Window
The [Project] window shows the work space folder and the source files included in the project that has
been opened.
When a source file icon is double-clicked, the source file will be opened or the corresponding [Edit]
window will be activated.
When the folder icon or a source file icon is clicked with the right mouse
button, a shortcut menu including the available build menu items
appears.
[Properties...] shows the source file information as follows:
Shortcut menu in the [Project] window
Note: Note that the list in the [project] window is not the actual directory structure.
Sources of the project in other folders than the work space folder are also listed as they exist in
the work space folder.
3.6.4 Opening and Closing a Project
To open a project, select [Open WorkSpace...] from the [File] menu.
A dialog box appears allowing selection of a project file.
The work bench allows only one project to be opened at a time. So if a project has been opened, it will be
closed when another project is opened. At this time, a dialog box appears to select whether the current
project file is to be saved or not if it has not already been saved after a modification.
The project file can also be opened by selecting [Open] from the [File] menu or clicking the [Open]
button. In this case, choose the file type as Project Files (*.epj) in the file open dialog box.
To close the currently opened project file, select [Close WorkSpace] from the [File] menu. At this time, a
dialog box appears to select whether the current project file is to be saved or not if it has not already been
saved after a modification. If [Yes] (save) is selected in this dialog box, all the modification items includ-
ing sources, tool settings and window configuration will be saved.
28
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
3.6.5 Files in the Work Space Folder
The work bench generates the following files in the work space folder:
<file>.epj
Project file
This file contains the project information.
<file>.cm
Linker command file
This file is generated when a build task is started, and is used by the linker to generate an absolute
object file.
Example:
; S1C WorkBench Generated
; Thursday, November 05, 1998
"C:\EPSON\S1C63\DEV\63A08\PAR63A08.PAR"
;ICE parameter file
-o "test.abs"
;output file : absolute object
; linked object file(s)
"sub.o"
"main.o"
The contents vary according to the source files included in the project and the linker option setting.
<file>.cmd
Debugger startup command file
This file is generated when a build task is started, and is used by the debugger to execute the com-
mand in this file when it is started up.
Example:
lf "test.abs"
The work bench generates this file so that the executable file according to the format selection is
loaded when the debugger starts up.
<file>.mak
"make" file for build task
This file is generated when a build task is started, and is used for the build process in the work bench.
Example:
# S1C WorkBench Generated
# Thursday, November 05, 1998
ASM = as63.exe
LINK = lk63.exe
HEX = hx63.exe
ASM_FLG = -g
LINK_FLG = -g
HEX_FLG =
ALL : test.abs
test.abs : test.cm sub.o main.o
$(LINK) $(LINK_FLG) test.cm
sub.o : C:\EPSON\S1C63\Test\sub.s
$(ASM) $(ASM_FLG) C:\EPSON\S1C63\Test\sub.s
main.o : C:\EPSON\S1C63\Test\main.s
$(ASM) $(ASM_FLG) C:\EPSON\S1C63\Test\main.s
This is a generic make file that contains macro setting and dependency list.
The following files are generated by the development tools during a build process:
<file>.o
<file>.abs
<file>.hsa, <file>.lsa, <file>.csa
Relocatable object files (generated by the assembler)
Absolute object file (generated by the linker)
Motorola S files (generated by the HEX converter when this format
is specified in the work bench)
<file>h.hex, <file>l.hex, <file>c.hex Intel HEX files (generated by the Hex converter when this format
is specified in the work bench)
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
29
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
3.7 Source Editor
The work bench has a source editor function. Sources can be created and modified in the [Edit] window.
3.7.1 Creating a New Source or Header File
To create a new source file:
1. Select [New] from the [File] menu or click the [New] button.
[New] button
The [New] dialog box appears.
2. Select [EPSON Assembly Source File] and click [OK].
An [Edit] window appears.
[Edit] window
Enter source codes here.
Enter source codes in this window.
The [New] dialog box allows selection of the [EPSON Header File]. Select it when creating a header file
for constant definitions.
30
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
3.7.2 Loading and Saving Files
To load a source file:
1. Select [Open...] from the [File] menu or click the [Open] button.
[Open] button
The [Open] dialog box appears.
2. Choose a source file to be opened after selecting the file type, "Assembly Source Files (*.s, *.ms)", and
click [OK]. An [Edit] window opens and shows the contents of the source file.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
31
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
To save the source:
1. Activate the [Edit] window of the source to be saved.
2. Select [Save as...] from the [File] menu.
The [Save As] dialog box appears.
3. Enter the file name and then click [OK].
When overwriting the source on the existing file, select [Save] from the [File] menu or click the [Save]
button.
[Save] button
To save all the source files opened and the project file, use the [File | Save All] menu item or the [Save
All] button.
[Save All] button
3.7.3 Edit Function
The source editor has general text editing functions similar to standard Windows applications.
Editing text
Basic text editing function is the same as general Windows applications.
Cut, copy and paste are supported in the [Edit] menu and with the toolbar buttons. These commands
are available only in the [Edit] window.
Undo can be selected from the [Edit] menu.
The tab stops are set at every 8 characters.
Find, replace and go to
Any words can be searched in the active [Edit] window.
Find
To find a word, select [Find...] from the [Edit] menu or click the [Find] button.
[Find] button
The [Find] dialog box appears.
32
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
The controls in the dialog are as follows:
[Find what:] text box
Enter the word to be found in this text box. The specified word is maintained as the finding word
even if this dialog box is closed.
[Match whole word only] check box
If this option is selected, the work bench searches only the words that are completely matched
with the specified word. If not, only the part of word that matches the specified word will be
searched.
[Match case] check box
If this option is specified, a case-sensitive search is performed. If not, a case-insensitive search is
performed.
[Direction] option
If the [Up] radio button is selected, the specified word is searched toward to the beginning of the
file. If the [Down] radio button is selected, a search is performed toward to the end of the file.
[Find Next] button
Clicking this button starts searching the specified word. If the specified word is found, the [Edit]
window refreshes the display and highlights the word found.
[Cancel] button
Clicking this button closes the dialog box.
Once a word to be found is specified in the [Find] dialog box, the [Find Next] and [Find Previous]
buttons on the toolbar can be used for a forward or backward search.
[Find Next] button
[Find Previous] button
Replace
To replace a word with another one, select [Replace] from the [Edit] menu.
The [Replace] dialog box appears.
The controls in the dialog are as follows:
[Find what:] text box
Enter the word to be found in this text box. If a word has been specified in the [Find] dialog box, it
appears in this box.
[Replace with:] text box
Enter the substitute word in this box.
[Match whole word only] check box
If this option is selected, the work bench searches only the words that are completely matched
with the specified word. If not, only the part of word that matches the specified word will be
searched.
[Match case] check box
If this option is specified, a case-sensitive search is performed. If not, a case-insensitive search is
performed.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
33
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
[Find Next] button
Clicking this button starts searching the specified word. If the specified word is found, the [Edit]
window refreshes the display and highlights the word found.
[Replace] button
By clicking this button after the specified word is found, it is replaced with the substitute word.
Then the work bench searches the next.
[Replace All] button
Replaces all the specified found words with the substitute word. Note that undo function cannot
be performed for this operation except for the last replaced word.
[Cancel] button
Clicking this button closes the dialog box.
Go to
You can go to any source line or any label position quickly.
To do this, select [Go To] from the [Edit] menu.
The [Go To] dialog box appears.
Going to a source line
1. Select "Line" in the [Go to what:] list box.
2. Type a line number in the [Enter Line Number] box and then click the [Go To] button.
Going to a label position
1. Select "Label" in the [Go to what:] list box.
The [Enter Line Number] box changes to the [Select Label] list box.
2. Select a label from the [Select Label] box and then click the [Go To] button.
The [Select Label] list box has a pull-down menu that contains the list of labels defined in the current
source file.
The [Edit] windows for source files (*.s, *.ms) have the [Go To Label] list box similar to the [Select
Label] list box in the [Go To] dialog box. You can also go to a label position using this box.
Inserting a file
To insert a file such as a header file and another source at the cursor position of the current source,
select [File...] from the [Insert] menu.
A dialog box will appears allowing selection of the file to be inserted.
34
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
Shortcut menu
The [Edit] window supports a short cut menu that appears by clicking the right mouse button on the
[Edit] window. It can also be done by pressing the [Short cut menu] key while the [Edit] window is
active if the key is available on the keyboard. It contains the editing menu items descried above, so
you can select an edit command using this menu.
3.7.4 Tag Jump Function
When assembler syntax errors occur during assembling, their error messages are displayed in the [Out-
put] window. In this case, you can go to the source line in which an error has occurred by double-clicking
the error message in the [Output] window.
However, this function is available only when the error message contains a source line number.
Linked with the corresponding source line
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
35
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
3.7.5 Printing
The document in the [Edit] window can be printed out.
The [Print...], [Print Preview] and [Page Setup...] commands are provided in the [File] menu. The [Print]
button can also be used. They have the same function as those of standard Windows application.
Select one after activating the [Edit] window of the document to be printed.
3.8 Build Task
By using the [Build] menu or [Build] toolbar, the assembler, linker, debugger, HEX converter and
disassembler can be executed from the work bench.
In the work bench, process to generate an executable object from the source files is called a build task.
For details of each development tool, refer to the respective chapter.
3.8.1 Preparing a Build Task
Before starting a build task, necessary source files should be prepared and tool options should be config-
ured.
1. Create a new project. (Refer to Section 3.6.1.)
2. Select an ICE parameter file. (Refer to Section 3.6.1.)
3. Create source files and add them into the project. (Refer to Sections 3.7 and 3.6.2.)
4. Select tool options (Refer to Section 3.9.)
3.8.2 Building an Executable Object
To generate an executable object:
1. Open the project file.
2. Select an output format (absolute, Intel HEX or Motorola S) using the [Output Format] list box.
3. Select [Build] from the [Build] menu or click the [Build] button.
[Build] button
The work bench generates a make file according to the source files in the project and the tool options set
by the user. This file is used to control invocation of tools.
First, the make process invokes the assembler for each source file to be assembled. If the latest relocatable
object file exists in the work space, the corresponding source file is not assembled to reduce process time.
Next, the linker is invoked to generate an absolute object file. The linker command file used in this phase
is automatically generated.
If absolute object has been selected as the output format, the build task is completed at this phase. If Intel
HEX or Motorola S has been selected, the HEX converter will be invoked to generate an object in the
specified format.
To rebuild all files including the latest relocatable object files, select [Rebuild All] from the [Build] menu
or click the [Rebuild All] button.
[Rebuild All] button
The build task can be suspended by selecting [Stop Build] from the [Build] menu or clicking the [Stop
Build] button.
[Stop Build] button
36
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
To invoke only the assembler, select [Assemble] from the [Build] menu or click the [Assemble] button
after activating the [Edit] window of the source to be assembled.
[Assemble] button
3.8.3 Debugging
To debug the generated executable file, select [Debug] from the [Build] menu or click the [Debug] button.
[Debug] button
The debugger starts up with the specified ICE parameter file and then loads the executable object by the
command file generated from the work bench.
This command file contains the command to load the specified type of an executable object to the
debugger. The contents of the command file can be edited in the [Settings] dialog box explained in
Section 3.9.
∗ When the building process is performed again after invoking the debugger, the debugger will reload
the object file if its window can be activated.
Refer to Chapter 8, "Debugger", for operating the debugger.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
37
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
3.8.4 Executing Other Tools
The HEX converter and disassembler can be invoked independently. The mask data creation tools can
also be invoked from wb63.
HEX converter
To invoke the HEX converter, select [HEX converter...] from the [Tools] menu or click the [HEX
convert] button.
[HEX convert] button
Then select an absolute object file to be converted in the [Hex data convert] dialog box.
This dialog box allows selection of the HEX converter options.
[ICE Parameter file:] list box
Select an ICE parameter file from the pull-down list.
[Output Format:] list box
Select an output format from between Intel HEX and Motorola S.
[Output error log file] check box
Select this option to generate the error log file of the HEX converter.
[Do not fill room with 0xFF] check box
Select this option when not filling the unused program area with 0xFF.
After selecting an absolute object and options, click the [Open] button. The HEX converter starts up
and converts the selected object into the specified format. The messages delivered from the HEX
converter are displayed in the [Output] window.
38
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
Disassembler
To invoke the disassembler, select [Disassembler...] from the [Tools] menu or click the [Disassemble]
button.
[Disassemble] button
Then select the executable object file to be disassembled in the [Disassemble] dialog box.
This dialog box allows selection of the disassembler options.
[Output error log file] check box
Select this option to generate the error log file of the disassembler.
[Output Option]
Select a character case option using the radio buttons.
When [Default] is selected, the disassembled source will be made with all labels in upper-case
characters and instructions in lower-case characters.
When [Upper case] is selected, the source will be made with upper-case characters only.
When [Lower case] is selected, the source will be made with lower-case characters only.
After selecting an executable object and options, click the [Open] button. The disassembler starts up
and converts the selected object into the source file. The messages delivered from the disassembler are
displayed in the [Output] window.
Function option generator, segment option generator, melody assembler
and mask data checker
The [Tools] menu allows invocation of the following tools:
[WinFOG]
[WinSOG]
[WinMLA]
[WinMDC]
Function option generator winfog (Chapter 9)
Segment option generator winsog (Chapter 10)
Melody assembler winmla (Chapter 11)
Mask data checker winmdc (Chapter 12)
Refer to the respective chapter for how to use each tool.
Note: These tools do not support some models (no device information definition file is provided). In this
case, other tools are provided for each model. However those tools cannot be invoked from the
[Tools] menu.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
39
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
3.9 Tool Option Settings
The development tools have startup options that can be specified when invoking them.
These settings can be made in the [Settings] dialog box that appears by selecting [Settings...] from the
[Build] menu.
Click the tool name tab to view option settings of each tool.
Clicking the [OK] button updates option setting information in the project and then closes the dialog box.
To continue to select other tool options, click the [Apply] button. This does not close the dialog box.
Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the dialog box.
3.9.1 Assembler Options
In this dialog, the following four assembler options can be selected.
[Error file]
Output of an error file (No: Not output, Yes: Output)
[Debug info] Addition of debugging information to the relocatable object (No: Not added, Yes: Added)
[List file]
[Defines]
Output of the relocatable list file (No: Not output, Yes: Output)
Name definition for conditional assembly (Enter a define name.)
40
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
The edit box shows the default setting ([Default]) and the list of source files in the project.
The default setting applies to all the sources excluding ones that are specified independently.
To select options of a specific source, select the check box at the front of the source file name.
Check here → ■ sub.s
No
No
No
Each of the [Error file], [Debug info] and [List file] options is set to either "No" or "Yes" and it toggles by
double-clicking. For example, to change the default [List file] option from "No" to "Yes", double click "No"
in the [Default] line. It changes to "Yes".
Source
[Default]
Error file
No
Debug info List file
Defines
Yes No ← Double-click here. It will be changed to Yes.
To define a name for conditional assembly, double-clicking the [Defines] part.
Source
[Default]
Error file
No
Debug info List file
Yes No
Defines
← Double-click here, then type a define name.
An text box appears. Type a name in the box. If two or more names are to be entered, separate each name
with a comma (,).
Refer to Chapter 4, "Assembler", for details of the assembler options.
3.9.2 Linker Options
In this dialog, section allocation, symbol definition and other linker options can be specified.
The work bench generates a linker command file including these specifications, and specifies it when
invoking the linker.
Specifying section allocation
This option is set by default as all the sections will be allocated from the memory start address. To
specify a section start address, double click the cell and then enter the address.
Source
BSS CODE DATA
■ [Default]
← Double-click here to change default CODE section start address, then type an address.
Source
BSS CODE DATA
0x100
■
■ [Default]
The edit box shows the default setting ([Default]) and the list of source files in the project.
The default setting applies to all the sections excluding those of the source specified.
To set a specific source independently, select the check box at the front of the source file name.
■
Check here → ■ sub.s
0x200
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
41
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
Symbol definition
To define a symbol, click the [New] button and then enter the symbol name and address in the edit
box.
Symbol
[
Addr
[
]
]
← Enter a symbol name and the address.
To modify a symbol name or address, double click the name or the address in the edit box and then
enter a new name or address.
Symbol
TEST
Addr
0x0000 ← Double-click to modify.
To delete a symbol, highlight the symbol line by clicking and then click the [Delete] button.
Other option selections
[Disable all branch optimization] check box
Select this option if extension code insertions, deletions and corrections are not necessary.
[Disable insertion of branch extension] check box
Select this option if extension code insersions are not necessary.
[Output Error log file] check box
Select this option to generate the error log file of the linker.
[Disable removal branch optimization] check box
Select this option if extension code deletions are not necessary.
[Add source debug information] check box
Select this option to add the debugging information. If this option is not specified, the sources
cannot be displayed in debugging.
[Output absolute list file] check box
Select this option to generate the absolute list file.
[Output Map file] check box
Select this option to generate the link map file.
[Output Symbol file] check box
Select this option to generate the symbol file.
[Output cross reference file] check box
Select this option to generate the cross reference file.
Refer to Chapter 5, "Linker", for details of the linker options.
42
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
3.9.3 Debugger Options
[COM Port:] list box
Select a COM port of the personal
computer used to communicate with
the ICE. COM1 is set by default.
[bps:] list box
Select a baud rate to communicate
with the ICE. 9600 bps is set by
default.
[Initial Command:] edit box
This box is used to edit the debugger
commands to be executed when the
debugger starts up. The work bench
generates a command file with the
commands entered in this box and
specifies it when invoking the
debugger. A load command is
initially set so that the debugger can
load the object at start up.
Refer to Chapter 8, "Debugger", for
details of the debugger options.
3.9.4 HEX Converter Options
[Output Format:] list box
An output format of the executable
object to be generated by the build
task can be selected.
When "Absolute Object" is selected,
the build task will be terminated
after linking has completed. The
HEX converter will not be invoked.
When "Intel Hex" or "Motorola S" is
selected, the HEX converter will be
invoked after linking has completed.
Other HEX converter options
become selectable when one of them
is selected.
[Do not fill room with 0xFF] check box
Select this option when not filling
the unused program area with 0xFF.
[Output error log file] check box
Select this option to generate the
error log file of the HEX converter.
Refer to Chapter 6, "HEX Converter", for
details of the HEX converter options.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
43
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
3.10 Work Bench Options
[Options...] in the [Tools] menu allows selection of some options for customizing the work bench. When
this menu item is selected, a dialog box appears.
File menu options
[MRU Files:] box
This option allows selection of a number of recently used files to be listed in the [File] menu. The
selectable range is 0 to 9.
[MRU Projects:] box
This option allows selection of a number of recently used project files to be listed in the [File]
menu. The selectable range is 0 to 9.
Print options
[Unit:] radio button
This option allows selection of a unit used for specifying the margins of the printing sheet. Either
"inch" or "mm" can be selected. This selection affects the margin setup field in the [Page Setup...]
dialog box.
[Font:] list box
This option allows selection of a font used for printing the document in the [Edit] window.
Editor options
[Auto Save:] box
This option sets an auto-save interval for the document to be edited in the [Edit] window. The
selectable range is 0 to 999 minutes. When 0 is selected, the document being edited will not be
automatically saved.
[Line No.] check box
This option enables or disables the line number display in the [Edit] window.
Color selection list box
These list boxes allow selection of colors used to display the document in the [Edit] window. Text
(mnemonics), comments, assembler pseudo-instructions, preprocessor pseudo-instructions, labels
and line numbers are displayed with different colors selected here.
Note: The contents selected in this dialog box will be effective after restarting the work bench.
44
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
3.11 Short-Cut Key List
Key operation
Function
Ctrl + N
Creates a new document
Ctrl + O
Opens an existing document
Opens an existing document
Saves the document
Ctrl + F12
Ctrl + S
Ctrl + P
Print the active document
Print the active document
Undoes the last action
Ctrl + Shift + F12
Ctrl + Z
Alt + BackSpace
Ctrl + X
Undoes the last action
Cuts the selection and puts it on the clipboard
Cuts the selection and puts it on the clipboard
Copies the selection to the clipboard
Copies the selection to the clipboard
Inserts the clipboard contents at the insertion point
Inserts the clipboard contents at the insertion point
Selects the entire document
Finds the specified text
Shift + Delete
Ctrl + C
Ctrl + Insert
Ctrl + V
Shift + Insert
Ctrl + A
Ctrl + F
F3
Finds next
Shift + F3
Ctrl + H
Finds previous
Replaces the specified text with different text
Moves to the specified location
Assembles the file
Ctrl + G
Ctrl + F7
F7
Builds the project
Ctrl + Break
F5
Stops the build
Debugs the project
Alt + F7
Edits the project build and debug settings
Next MDI Window
Ctrl + Tab
Short-cut-key
Shift + F10
Opens the popup menu
Opens the popup menu
3.12 Error Messages
The work bench error messages are given below.
Error message
Description
<filename> is changed by another editor. Reopen this file?
Cannot create file: <filename>
The currently opened file is modified by another editor.
The file (linker command file, debugger command file,
etc.) cannot be created.
Cannot find file: <filename>
The source file cannot be found.
Cannot find ICE parameter file
The ICE parameter file cannot be found.
The source file cannot be opened.
Cannot open file: <filename>
You cannot close workspace while a build is in progress.
Select the Stop Build command before closing.
The project close command or work bench terminate
command is specified while the build task is being
processed.
Would you like to build it?
The debugger invoke command is specified when the
build task has not already been completed.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
45
CHAPTER 3: WORK BENCH
3.13 Precautions
(1) The source file that can be displayed and edited in the work bench is limited to 16M byte size.
(2) The label search and coloring function of the work bench does not support labels that have not ended
with a colon (:).
(3) The work bench can create a make, linker command and debugger command files, note, however, that
these files or settings created with another editor cannot be input into the work bench.
46
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
CHAPTER 4 ASSEMBLER
This chapter describes the functions of the assembler as63 and grammar involved with the creation
of assembly source files.
4.1 Functions
The assembler as63 is a tool that constitutes the core of this software package. It assembles (translates)
assembly source files and creates object files in the machine language.
The functions and features of the assembler are summarized below:
• Allows absolute and relocatable sections mixed in one source.
• Allows to develop programs in multiple sources by creating relocatable object files that can be com-
bined by the linker.
• Can add source debugging information for source debugging on the debugger.
• Upper compatible with the old S1C63 preprocessor and assembler.
The assembler provides the following additional functions as well as the basic assembly functions:
• Macro definition and macro invocation
• Definition of Define name
• Operators
• Insertion of other file
• Conditional assembly
The assembler processes source files in two stages: preprocessing stage and assembling stage. The
preprocessing stage expands the additional function part described in the source file to mnemonics that
can be assembled, and delivers them to a temporary file (preprocessed file). The assembling stage as-
semble the preprocessed file to convert the source codes into the machine codes.
4.2 Input/Output Files
Assembly source file
file.s
Assembler
as63
file.lst
file.o
file.ms
file.err
Relocatable Object file
list file
Preprocessed Error file
source file
to Linker
Fig. 4.2.1 Flow chart
4.2.1 Input File
Assembly source file
File format: Text file
File name: <File name>.s
<File name>.ms (A preprocessed source file created by the assembler or disassembler.)
Description: File in which a source program is described. If the file extension is omitted, the
assembler finds a source file that has the specified file name and an extension ".s".
Note: When a ".s" source file is specified, it will be processed in the preprocessing stage
and then the assembling stage. When a ".ms" source file is specified, it will be
processed only in the assembling stage. Therefore, ".ms" files cannot include prepro-
cessor instructions.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
47
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.2.2 Output Files
Object file
File format: Binary file in relocatable IEEE-695 format
File name: <file name>.o (The <file name> is the same as that of the input file, unless otherwise
specified with the -o option.)
Output destination: Current directory
Description: File in which machine language codes are stored in a relocatable form available for
the linker to link with other modules and to generate an executable absolute object.
Relocatable list file
File format: Text file
File name: <file name>.lst (The <file name> is the same as that of the input file, unless other-
wise specified with the -o option.)
Output destination: Current directory
Description: File in which offset locations, machine language codes and source codes are stored
in plain text.
Preprocessed file
File format: Text file
File name: <file name>.ms (The <file name> is the same as that of the input file, unless other-
wise specified with the -o option.)
Output destination: Current directory
Description: File in which instructions for preprocessing (e.g. conditional assembly and macro
instructions) are expanded into an assembling format.
Error file
File format: Text file
File name: <file name>.err (The <file name> is the same as that of the input file, unless other-
wise specified with the -o option.)
Output destination: Current directory
Description: The file is created if the -e option is specified. It records error messages and other
information which the assembler delivers via the Standard Output (stdout).
48
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.3 Starting Method
General form of command line
as63 [options] [<source file name>]
^
^
denotes a space.
[ ] indicates the possibility to omit.
^
Source file name
In the command line, only one assembly source file can be specified at a time. Therefore, you will
have to process multiple files by executing the assembler the number of times equal to the number of
files to be processed.
A long file name supported in Windows and a path name can be specified. When including spaces in
the file name, enclose the file name with double quotation marks (").
Options
The assembler comes provided with the following six start-up options:
-d <define name>
Function: Definition of Define name
Explanation: • Works in the same manner as you describe "#define <define name>" at top of
the source. It is an option to control the conditional assembly at the start-up.
• One or more spaces are necessary between -d and the <define name>.
• To define two or more Define names, repeat the specification of "-d <define
name>".
-g
Function: Addition of debugging information
Explanation: • Creates an output file containing symbolic/source debugging information.
• Always specify this function when you perform symbolic/source debugging.
Default: If this option is not specified, no debugging information will be added to the
relocatable object file.
-o <file name>
Function: Specification of output path/file name
Explanation: • Specifies an output path/file name without extension or with an extension ".o".
If no extension is specified, ".o" will be supplemented at the end of the specified
output path/file name.
Default: The input file name is used for the output file names.
-c
Function: Ignore character case of symbols
Explanation: • Allows description of symbols in case insensitive.
Default: If this option is not specified, symbol names will be case sensitive.
-l
Function: Output of relocatable list file
Explanation: • Outputs a relocatable list file.
Default: If this option is not specified, no relocatable list file will be output.
-e
Function: Output of error file
Explanation: • Creates an .err file which contains the information that the assembler outputs to
the Standard Output (stdout), such as error messages.
Default: If this option is not specified, no error file will be created.
When entering an option in the command line, you need to place one or more spaces before and after
the option. The options can be specified in any order. It is also possible to enter options after the
source file name.
Example: c:\epson\s1c63\bin\as63 -g -e -l -d TEST1 -d TEST2 test.s
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
49
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.4 Messages
The assembler delivers all its messages through the Standard Output (stdout).
Start-up message
The assembler outputs only the following message when it starts up.
Assembler 63 Ver x.xx
Copyright (C) SEIKO EPSON CORP. 1998-2001
End message
The assembler outputs the following messages to indicate which files have been created when it ends
normally.
Created preprocessed source file <FILENAME.MS>
Created relocatable object file <FILENAME.O>
Created relocatable list file <FILENAME.LST>
Created error log file <FILENAME.ERR>
Assembly 0 error(s) 0 warning(s)
Usage output
If no file name was specified or the option was not specified correctly, the assembler ends after
delivering the following message concerning the usage:
Usage: as63 [options] <file name>
Options: -d <symbol>
Add preprocess definition
-e
-g
-l
-c
Output error log file (.ERR)
Add source debug information in object
Output relocatable list file (.LST)
Ignore character case of symbols
-o <file name> Specify output file name
File name: Source file name (.S or .MS)
When error/warning occurs
If an error is produced, an error message will appear before the end message shows up.
Example:
TEST.S(5) Error: Illegal syntax
Assembly 1 error(s) 0 warning(s)
In the case of an error, the assembler ends without creating an output file. If an error occurs at the
preprocessing stage in the assembler, the assembler stops processing and outputs preprocess-level
errors only.
If a warning is issued, a warning message will appear before the end message shows up.
Example:
TEST.S(6) Warning: Expression out of range
Assembly 0 error(s) 1 warning(s)
In the case of a warning, the assembler ends after creating an output file.
The source file name that was specified in the command line will appear at the beginning of the error
and warning messages.
For details on errors and warnings, refer to Section 4.10, "Error/Warning Messages".
50
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.5 Grammar of Assembly Source
Assembly source files should be created on a general-purpose editor or the source editor of the work
bench. Save sources as standard text files. For the file name, a long file name supported in Windows can
be specified.
This section explains the rules and grammar involved with the creation of assembly source files.
4.5.1 Statements
Each individual instruction or definition of an assembly source is called a statement. The basic composi-
tion of a statement is as follows:
Syntax pattern
(1) Mnemonic
(2) Assembler pseudo-instruction
(3) Label:
Operand
Parameter
(;comment)
(;comment)
(;comment)
(4) ;comment
Example:
#include "define.h"
.set IO1, 0xfff1
<Statement>
<Syntax Pattern>
(2)
(2)
; TEXT SECTION (ROM, 13bit width)
(4)
.org 0x100
(2)
(3)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
NMI:
reti
nop
nop
jr
NMI
.org 0x110
(2)
(3)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
BOOT:
ld
ld
ld
%f,0x4
%a,0
%a,0
ldb %ext,0 ; clear memory 0 to 3
:
:
The example given above is an ordinary source description method. For increased visibility, the elements
composing each statement are aligned with tabs and spaces.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
51
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
Restrictions
• Only one statement can be described in one line. A description containing more than two instructions
in one line will result in an error. However, a comment or a label may be described in the same line
with an instruction.
Example:
;OK
BOOT:
ld
ld
%f,0x4
%f,0x4
;Error
BOOT:
ld
%a,0x0
• One statement cannot be described in more than one line. A statement that cannot complete in one
line will result in an error.
Example:
.word
.word
0x0,0x1,0x2,0x3... OK
0xa,0xb,0xc,0xd... OK
.word
0x0,0x1,0x2,0x3
0xa,0xb,0xc,0xd... Error
• The maximum describable number of characters in one line is 259 (ASCII characters). If this number is
exceeded, an error will result.
• The usable characters are limited to ASCII characters (alphanumeric symbols), except for use in
comments. Also, the usable symbols have certain limitations (details below).
• The reserved words such as mnemonics and pseudo-instructions are all not case sensitive, while the
user defined items such as labels and symbols are all case sensitive if the -c option is not specified.
Therefore, mnemonics and pseudo-instructions can be written in uppercase (A–Z) characters, lower-
case (a–z) characters, or both. For example, "ld", "LD", and "Ld" are all accepted as "ld" instructions.
For purposes of discrimination from symbols, this manual uses lowercase characters for the reserved
words.
52
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.5.2 Instructions (Mnemonics and Pseudo-instructions)
The assembler supports all the mnemonics of the S1C63000 instruction set and the assembler pseudo-
instructions. The following shows how to describe the instructions.
Mnemonics
An instruction is generally composed of [mnemonic] + [operand]. Some instructions do not contain an
operand.
General notation forms of instructions
General forms: <Mnemonic>
<Mnemonic> tab or space <Operand>
<Mnemonic> tab or space <Operand1>, <Operand2>
<Mnemonic> tab or space <Operand1>, <Operand2>, <Operand3>
Examples:
nop
jr
NMI
ld
%f,0x4
There is no restriction as to where the description of a mnemonic should begin in a line. A tab or space
preceding a mnemonic is ignored.
An instruction containing an operand needs to be separated into the mnemonic and the operand with
one or more tabs or spaces. If an instruction requires multiple operands, the operands must be
separated from each other with one comma (,). Space between operands is ignored.
The elements of operands will be described further below.
Types of mnemonics
The following 39 types of mnemonics can be used in the S1C63 Family:
add adc and bit calr calz clr cmp dec ex halt inc int jp jr jrc jrnc jrnz
jrz ld ldb nop or pop push ret retd reti rets rl rr sbc set sll slp srl sub
tst xor
For details on instructions, refer to the "S1C63000 Core CPU Manual".
Note
The assembler is commonly used for all the S1C63 Family models, so all the instructions can be
accepted. Be aware that no error will occur in the assembler even if instructions or operands unavail-
able for the model are described. They will be checked in the linker.
Assembler pseudo-instructions
The assembler pseudo-instructions are not converted to execution codes, but they are designed to
control the assembler or to set data.
For discrimination from other instructions, all the assembler pseudo-instructions begin with a sharp
(#) or a period (.).
General notation forms of pseudo-instructions
General forms: <Pseudo-instruction>
<Pseudo-instruction> tab or space <Parameter>
<Pseudo-instruction> tab or space <Parameter1> tab, space or comma <Parameter2> ...
Examples:
#define
.org
SW1 1
0x100
.comm
BUF 4
There is no restriction as to where the description of an instruction may begin in a line.
An instruction containing a parameter needs to be separated into the instruction and the parameter
with one or more tabs or spaces. If an instruction requires multiple parameters, they are separated
from each other with an appropriate delimiter.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
53
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
Types of pseudo-instructions
The following 25 types of pseudo-instructions are available:
#include #define #macro #endm #ifdef #ifndef #else #endif #defnum
.abs .align .org .code .data .bss .codeword .word .comm .lcomm
.global .set .list .nolist .stabs .stabn
For details of each pseudo-instruction and its functionality, refer to Section 4.7, "Assembler Pseudo-
Instructions".
Restriction
The mnemonics and pseudo-instructions are all not case sensitive. Therefore, they can be written in
uppercase (A–Z) characters, lowercase (a–z) characters, or both. For example, "ld", "LD", and "Ld" are
all accepted as "ld" instructions. However, the user defined symbols used in the operands or param-
eters are case sensitive. They must be the same with the defined characters. When assembling with the
"-c" option, all symbols are case insensitive.
4.5.3 Symbols (Labels)
A symbol (label) is an identifier designed to refer to an arbitrary address in the program. It is possible to
refer to a branch destination of a program or a data memory address using the defined symbol.
Definition of a symbol
Usable symbols are defined as 16-bit values by any of the following methods:
1. <Symbol>:
Example: LABEL1:
... LABEL1 is a label that indicates the address of a described location.
Preceding spaces and tabs are ignored. It is a general practice to describe from the top of a line.
2. Definition using the .set pseudo-instruction
Example: .set ADDR1 0xff00
... ADDR1 is a symbol that represents absolute address 0xff00.
3. Definition using the .comm or .lcomm pseudo-instruction
Example: .comm BUF1 4
... BUF1 is a label that represents a RAM address.
The .comm and .lcomm pseudo instructions can define labels only in bss sections (data memory
such as RAM). Program memory addresses cannot be defined.
Reference with symbols
A defined symbol denotes an address.
The actual address value should be determined in the linking process, except in the case of absolute
sections.
Examples: LABEL1:
:
jr
LABEL1
... jumps to the LABEL1 location.
.set IO_M 0xfff0
.org 0x0000
.bss
.comm COUNT1 1
.code
ldb
ldb
%ext,IO_M@h
%xl,IO_M@l ... 0xfff0 is loaded to X-register. (@h and @l are symbol masks.)
inc [COUNT1]
... Regarded as inc [0x0000].
54
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
Scope
The scope is a reference range of a symbol (label). It is called local if the symbol is to be referenced
within the same file, and it is called global if the symbol is to be referenced from other files.
Any defined symbol's scope is local in default. To make a symbol's scope global, use the .global
pseudo-instruction both in the file in which the symbol is defined and in the file that references the
symbol.
A double definition of local symbols will be an error at the assembly stage, while a double definition
of global symbols will be an error at the link stage.
Example:
File in which global symbol is defined (file1)
.global
SYMBOL:
SYMBOL
... Global declaration of a symbol which is to be defined in this file.
:
LABEL:
... Local symbol
:
(Can be referenced to only in this file)
File in which a global symbol is referenced to (file2)
.global
call
:
SYMBOL
SYMBOL
... Global declaration of a symbol defined in other source file.
... Symbol externally referenced to.
LABEL:
... Local symbol
:
(Treated as a different symbol from LABEL of file1)
The assembler regards those symbols as those of undefined addresses in the assembling, and includes
that information in the object file it delivers. Those addresses are finally determined by the processing
of the linker.
∗ When a symbol is defined by the .comm pseudo-instruction, that symbol will be a global symbol.
Therefore, in a defined file, no global declaration needs to be made using the .global pseudo-instruc-
tion. On the contrary, in a file to be referenced, the global declaration is necessary prior to the refer-
ence.
Symbol masks
Symbol masks are designed to acquire the upper 8-bit address and the lower 8-bit address from a
symbol representing a 16-bit address.
The following 5 types of symbol masks can be used:
@l or @L
Acquires the lower 8 bits of an absolute address.
@h or @H
@rl or @RL
@rh or @RH
@xh or @XH
Acquires the upper 8 bits of an absolute address.
Acquires the lower 8 bits of a relative address.
Acquires the upper 8 bits of a relative address.
Acquires the upper 8 bits of an absolute address by inverting them (Used exclu-
sively for the "ldb" instruction combined with the "cmp" instruction).
Sample uses:
ldb
ldb
%ext,ADDR@h
%xl,ADDR@l
... Functions as "ld %x, ADDR (16-bit)"
... Functions as "add %x, NUM (16-bit)"
... Functions as "calr LABEL (16-bit)"
... Functions as "cmp %x, DATA (16-bit)"
ldb
add
%ext,NUM@h
%x,NUM@l
ldb
calr
%ext,LABEL@rh
LABEL@rl
ldb
cmp
%ext,DATA@xh
%x,DATA@l
.set
ldb
ld
IO_ADDR 0xff12
%ext,IO_ADDR@l
%a,[%y]
... Functions as "ld %a, [IO_ADDR]"
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
55
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
Restrictions
• The maximum number of characters of a symbol is 259 (not including colon). If this number is ex-
ceeded, an error will result.
• Only the following characters can be used:
A–Z a–z _ 0–9 ?
• A symbol cannot begin with a numeral.
Examples: ;OK
FOO:
;Error
1lable:
L 1:
L1:
.set IO 0xfff0
.comm BUF 4
.set
#IO
0xfff0
.lcomm 1st_BUF 2
• Since symbols are case sensitive by default, uppercase and lowercase are discriminated. When refer-
encing a defined symbol, use the characters exactly the same as the defined symbol.
Examples: _Abcd:
:
jr
_ABCD
... Does not jump to _Abcd
However, symbols will be case insensitive if the -c option is specified.
• The symbol masks are effective only on the defined symbols. If a symbol mask is applied to a numeric
value, an error will result.
• If a symbol mask is omitted, the lower bits effective for that instruction will be used. However, if the
bit value does not fall within the instruction range, an error or warning will be issued.
• Symbols and symbol masks cannot be used on 4-bit immediate values.
4.5.4 Comments
Comments are used to describe a series of routines, or the meaning of each statement. Comments cannot
comprise part of coding.
Definition of comment
A character string beginning with a semicolon (;) and ending with a line feed code (LF) is interpreted
as a comment. Not only ASCII characters, but also other non-ASCII characters can be used to describe
a comment.
Examples: ;This line is a comment line.
LABEL:
;This is the comment for LABEL.
ld %a,%b ;This is the comment for the instruction on the left.
Restrictions
• A comment is allowed up to 259 characters, including a semicolon (;), spaces before, after and inside
the comment, and a return/line feed code.
• When a comment extends to several lines, each line must begin with a semicolon.
Examples: ;These are
comment lines.
... The second line will not be regarded as a comment. An error will
result.
;These are
; comment lines.
... Both lines will be regarded as comments.
4.5.5 Blank Lines
This assembler also allows a blank line containing only a return/line feed code. It need not be made into a
comment line using a semicolon.
56
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.5.6 Register Names
The CPU register names may be written in either uppercase or lowercase letters.
Table 4.5.6.1 Notations of register names
Register
Notation
%a, %A, a or A
A
Data register A
Data register B
BA-register pair
Index register X
B
%b, %B, b or B
%ba, %BA, ba or BA
%x, %X, x or X
BA
X
XH
XL
Y
Upper 8 bits of X-register %xh, %XH, xh or XH
Lower 8 bits of X-register %xl, %XL, xl or XL
Index register Y
%y, %Y, y or Y
YH
YL
F
Upper 8 bits of Y-register %yh, %YH, yh or YH
Lower 8 bits of Y-register %yl, %YL, yl or YL
Flag register F
%f, %F, f or F
EXT Extension register EXT
SP1 Stack pointer SP1
SP2 Stack pointer SP2
%ext, %EXT, ext or EXT
%sp1, %SP1, sp1 or SP1
%sp2, %SP2, sp2 or SP2
Note: "%" can be omitted. These symbols are reserved words, therefore they cannot be used as user-
defined symbol names.
4.5.7 Numerical Notations
This Assembler supports three kinds of numerical notations: decimal, hexadecimal, and binary.
Decimal notations of values
Notations represented with 0–9 only will be regarded as decimal numbers. To specify a negative
value, put a minus sign (-) before the value.
Examples: 1 255 -3
Characters other than 0–9 and the sign (-) cannot be used.
Hexadecimal notations of values
To specify a hexadecimal number, place "0x" before the value.
Examples: 0x1a 0xff00
"0x" cannot be followed by characters other than 0–9, a–f, and A–F.
Binary notations of values
To specify a binary number, place "0b" before the value.
Examples: 0b1001 0b1001100
"0b" cannot be followed by characters other than 0 or 1.
Specified ranges of values
The size (specified range) of immediate data varies with each instruction.
The specifiable ranges of different immediate data are given below.
Table 4.5.7.1 Types of immediate data and their specifiable ranges
Symbol
Type
Decimal
0–3
Hexadecimal
0x0–0x3
0x0–0xf
Binary
imm2 2-bit immediate data
0b0–0b11
imm4 4-bit immediate data
0–15
0b0–0b1111
imm6 Software vectored interrupt address
imm8 8-bit immediate data
0–64
0x0–0x3f
0x0–0xff
0x1–0x10
0x0–0xff
0x0–0x3f
0b0–0b111111
0b0–0b11111111
0b0–0b10000
0b0–0b11111111
0b0–0b111111
0–255
1–16
n4
sign8 Signed 8-bit immediate data
add6 6-bit address
4-bit n-ary specified data
-128–127
0–64
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
57
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
Other numerical notations
The following numerical notations can also be used:
nnnnB: Binary numbers
nnnnO: Octal numbers
nnnnQ: Octal numbers
nnnnH: Hexadecimal numbers
"nnnnB" (binary numbers) and "nnnnH" (hexadecimal numbers) are converted into the new format
("0bnnnn" and "0xnnnn") in the preprocessing stage.
"nnnnO" and "nnnnQ" (octal numbers) are converted into hexadecimal numbers ("0xnnnn") in the
preprocessing stage.
ASCII to HEX conversion
One or two ASCII characters (enclosed with ' ') can be described in source files unless converting into
numbers. The numeric operators can also be used. The described characters are converted into ASCII
codes and delivered to the output relocatable object file.
Examples: retd '1'
→ (retd 0x31)
retd '23'
→ (retd 0x3233)
retd '4'+1 → (retd 0x35)
Note: Three or more characters and the following characters cannot be described:
Control codes (0x0 to 0x1f) space @ [ ] ; ,
4.5.8 Operators
An expression that consists of operators, numbers and/or defined symbols (including labels) can be used
for specifying a number or defining a Define name (only for number definition).
The preprocess in the assembler handles expressions in signed 16-bit data and expands them as hexadeci-
mal numbers.
Types of operators
Arithmetic operators
Examples
+
Addition, Plus sign
+0xff, 1+2
-
Subtraction, Minus sign -1+2, 0xff-0b111
*
/
Multiplication
Division
Residue
Shifting to right
Shifting to left
Acquires upper 8 bits
Acquires lower 8 bits
Parenthesis
0xf*5
0x123/0x56
0x123%0x56
1>>2
0x113<<3
0x1234^H
0x1234^L
1+(1+2*5)
%
>>
<<
^H
^L
( )
(%% is also be supported.)
The arithmetic operator returns the result of arithmetic operation on the specified terms.
Logical operators
Examples
&
|
^
~
Bit AND
Bit OR
Bit XOR
0b1101&0b111
0b123|0xff
12^35
Bit inversion
~0x1234
The logical operator returns the result of logic operation on the specified terms.
58
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
Relational operators
Examples
SW==0
SW!=0
==
!=
<
Equal
Not equal
Less than
ABC<5
<=
>
>=
&&
||
Less than or equal
Greater than
Greater than or equal
AND
ABC<=5
ABC>5
ABC>=5
ABC&&0xf
ABC||0b1010
OR
The relational operator returns 1 if the expression is true, otherwise it returns 0.
Priority
The operators have the priority shown below. If there are two or more operators with the same
priority in an expression, the assembler calculates the expression from the left.
1. ( )
High priority
2. + (plus sign), - (minus sign), ~
3. ^H, ^L
↑
4. *, /, % (%%)
5. + (addition), - (subtraction)
6. <<, >>
7. ==, !=, <, <=, >, >=
8.
9.
&
^
10. |
11. &&
12. ||
↓
Low priority
Examples
#defnum BLK_HEADER_SIZE 4
#defnum BLK_START 0x30+BLK_HEADER_SIZE*2
#defnum BLK_END BLK_START+4*2
#macro ADD_X ADDR
ldb
add
%ext,(ADDR*2)^H
%x,(ADDR*2)^L
... Can be used in macros.
#endm
ldb
ldb
ld
%ext,BLK_START^H ; %x=BLK_START
%xl, BLK_START^L
[%x],0b11&0x110
ldb
cmp
%ext, ~BLK_END^H ; cmp %x, BLK_END
%x, BLK_END^L
ADD_X (0x1200+0x34)*2
; %x+=0x1234*2
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
59
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
Precautions
• Minus numbers -1 to -32768 are handled as 0xffff to 0x8000.
• The assembler handles expressions as 16-bit data. Pay attention to the data size when using it as 4-bit
immediate data, especially when it has a minus value.
Example:
ld %a,-2+1
ld %a,(-2+1)&0xf
... NG. It will be expanded as "ld a,0xffff".
... OK. It will be expanded as "ld a,0xf".
• Expressions are calculated with a sign (like a signed short in C language).
Pay attention to the calculation results of the >>, / and % operators using hexadecimal numbers.
Example:
.set NUM1 0xfffe/2
The / and % operators can only be used within the range of +32767 to -32768.
.set NUM2 0xfffe>>1 ... -2>>1 = -1 (0xffff)
... -2/2 = -1 (0xffff)
Mask as (0xfffe>>1)&0x7fff.
• When using an expression in a #define statement, it will be expanded as is. Pay attention when a
number is defined using the #define pseudo-instruction.
Example:
#define NUM1 1+1
ld
#define NUM2 (1+1)
ld %a,NUM2*2
%a,NUM1*2
... This will be expanded as "ld %a, 1+1*2" (=3).
... This will be expanded as "ld %a, (1+1)*2" (=4).
• Do not insert a space or a tab between an operator and a term.
4.5.9 Location Counter Symbol "$"
The address of each instruction code is set in the 16-bit location counter when a statement is assembled. It
can be referred using a symbol "$" as well as labels. "$" indicates the current location, thus it can be used
for relative branch operation. The operators can be used with this symbol similar to labels.
Example: jr $
jr $+2
jr $-10
... Jumps to this address (means endless loop).
... Jumps to two words after this address.
... Jumps to 10 words before this address.
jr $+16+(16*(BLK>16)) ... Operators and defined symbols can be used.
Precaution
When the address referred to relatively with "$" is in another section, it should be noted if the in-
tended section resides at the addressed place, because if the section is relocatable, the absolute
address is not fixed until the linking is completed.
4.5.10 Optimization Branch Instructions for Old Preprocessor
The old version of the S1C63 preprocessor has optimization branch instructions for optimizing the
extension code. Since this function is supported by the linker in the current version, they are expanded
without an extension code in the assembler. The relative distance to the label does not affect this expan-
sion.
Optimization Branch Instruction
Mnemonic after Expansion
xjr
LABEL
→
→
→
→
→
→
jr
jrc
LABEL
LABEL
xjrc LABEL
xjrnc LABEL
xjrz LABEL
xjrnz LABEL
xcalr LABEL
jrnc LABEL
jrz LABEL
jrnz LABEL
calr LABEL
60
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.6 Section Management
4.6.1 Definition of Sections
The memory configuration of the S1C63 Family microcomputer is divided into a code ROM that contains
programs written, and data memories such as data RAM and I/O memory. Moreover, some models carry
a data ROM that holds static data written.
A section refers to an area where codes are written (or to be mapped), and there are three types of sec-
tions in correspondence with the memories:
1. CODE section
2. DATA section
3. BSS section
Area located within a code ROM.
Area located within a data ROM.
Denotes a RAM area.
To allow to specify these sections in a source file, the assembler comes provided with pseudo-instruc-
tions.
CODE section
The .code pseudo-instruction defines a CODE section. Statements from this instruction to another
section defining instruction will be regarded as program codes, and will be so processed as to be
mapped in the code ROM. The source file will be regarded as a CODE section by default. Therefore,
the part that goes from top of the file, to another section will be processed as a CODE section. Because
this section is of 13 bits/word, 4-bit data cannot be defined.
DATA section
The .data pseudo-instruction defines a DATA section. Statements from this instruction to another
section defining instruction will be regarded as 4-bit data, and will be so processed as to be mapped in
the data ROM. Therefore, nothing else can be described in this area other than the symbols for
referring to the address of the data ROM, the 4-bit data defining pseudo-instruction (.word), and
comments. This section is applied only to models having a data ROM.
BSS section
The .bss pseudo-instruction defines a BSS section. Statements from this instruction to another section
defining instruction will be regarded as 4-bit data, and will be so processed as to be mapped in the
data memory (RAM). Therefore, nothing else can be described in this area other than the symbols for
referring to the address of the data memory, the area securing pseudo-instructions (.comm and
.lcomm).
The .comm pseudo-instruction and the .lcomm pseudo-instruction are designed to define the symbol
and size of a data area. Although the BSS section basically consists in a RAM area, it can as well be
used as a data memory area, such as display memory and I/O memory. Since code definition in this
area is meaningless in embedded type microcomputers, such as those of the S1C63 Family, nothing
else can be described other than the two instructions and comments.
4.6.2 Absolute and Relocatable Sections
The assembler is a relocatable assembler that always generates an relocatable object and needs the linker
to make it into an executable absolute object. However, each section in one source can be absolute or
relocatable depending on how they are described. The section whose absolute address is specified with
the .org pseudo-instruction in the source is an absolute section, while the section whose absolute address
is not specified is an relocatable section. Absolute addresses of relocatable sections will be fixed by the
linker. Both types of sections can be included in one source.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
61
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.6.3 Sample Definition of Sections
:
CODE1 (Relocatable program)
:
.data
:
DATA1 (Relocatable data definition)
:
.bss
:
BSS1 (Relocatable RAM area definition)
:
.code
.org 0x0
:
... If this specification is omitted, a CODE section begins from the address following CODE1.
CODE2 (Absolute program)
:
.bss
.org 0x0
:
... If this specification is omitted, a BSS section begins from the address following BSS1.
BSS2 (Absolute RAM area definition)
:
.code
:
CODE3 (Relocatable program)
:
.data
.org 0x8000
:
... If this specification is omitted, a DATA section begins from the address following DATA1.
DATA2 (Absolute data definition)
:
In the section definition shown above, absolute sections and relocatable sections are mixed in one source.
Absolute sections are sections whose absolute addresses are specified with the .org pseudo-instructions.
CODE2, BSS2 and DATA2 are absolute sections. Absolute sections will be located at the place specified.
Other sections are relocatable in the sense that the absolute location addresses are not fixed at the assem-
bly stage and will be fixed later at the linking stage.
Precautions
When there appears in a section a statement which is designed for other section, a warning will be
issued and a new section will be started according to the statement.
Examples: .code
.comm BUF 16 ... Warning; A new bss section begins
.bss
ld
%a,%b
... Warning; A new code section begins
62
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.7 Assembler Pseudo-Instructions
The assembler pseudo-instructions are not converted to execution codes, but they are designed to control
the assembler or to set data.
For discrimination from other instructions, all the assembler pseudo-instructions begin with a character
"#" or ".". The instructions that begin with "#" are preprocessed pseudo-instructions and they are ex-
panded into forms that can be assembled. The expanded results are delivered in the preprocessed file
(.ms). The original statements of the pseudo-instructions (#) are changed as comments by attaching a ";"
before delivering to the file. The instruction that begins with "." are used for section and data definitions.
They are not converted at the preprocessing stage.
All the pseudo-instruction characters are not case sensitive.
The following pseudo-instructions are available in the assembler:
Pseudo-instruction
#include
#define
#defnum
#macro–#endm
#ifdef–#else–#endif
Function
Includes another source.
Defines a constant string.
Defines a constant number. (∗1)
Defines a macro.
Defines an assemble condition.
#ifndef–#else–#endif Defines an assemble condition.
.abs
Specifies absolute assembling. (∗1)
.align
.org
Sets alignment of a section.
Sets an absolute address.
.code
.data
.bss
.codeword
.word
.comm
.lcomm
.global
.set
Declares a CODE section (mapping to the built-in code ROM).
Declares a DATA section (mapping to the built-in data ROM).
Declares a BSS section (mapping to the built-in RAM).
Defines data in the CODE section.
Defines data in the DATA section.
Secures a global area in the BSS section.
Secures a local area in the BSS section.
Defines an external reference symbol.
Defines an absolute address symbol.
Controls assembly list output.
.list
.nolist
.stabs
.stabn
Controls assembly list output.
Debugging information (source name).
Debugging information (line number).
∗1: Maintained only for compatibility with the older assembler.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
63
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.7.1 Include Instruction (#include)
The include instruction inserts the contents of a file in any location of a source file. It is useful when the
same source is shared in common among several source files.
Instruction format
#include "<File name>"
• A drive name or path name can as well be specified as the file name.
• One or more spaces are necessary between the instruction and the "<File name>".
• Character case is ignored for both #include itself and "<File name>".
Sample descriptions:
#include
#include
"sample.def"
"c:\EPSON\S1C63\header\common.h"
Expansion rule
The specified file is inserted in the location where #include was described.
Precautions
• Only files created in text file format can be inserted.
• The #include instruction can be used in the including files. However, nesting is limited up to 10 levels.
If this limit is surpassed, an error will result.
64
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.7.2 Define Instruction (#define)
Any substitute character string can be left defined as a Define name by the define instruction (#define),
and the details of that definition can be referred to from various parts of the program using the Define
name.
Instruction format
#define <Define name> [<Substitute character string>]
<Define name>:
• The first character is limited to a–z, A–Z, ? and _.
• The second and the subsequent characters can use a–z, A–Z, 0–9, ? and _.
• Uppercase and lowercase characters are discriminated. (#define itself is case insensitive.)
When assembling with the "-c" option, all symbols are case insensitive.
• One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between the instruction and the Define name.
<Substitute character string>:
• When writing all characters can be used, but a semicolon (;) is interpreted as the start of a comment.
• Uppercase and lowercase characters are discriminated.
• One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between the Define name and the substitute character string.
• The substitute character string can be omitted. In that case, NULL is defined in lieu of the substitute
character string. It can be used for the conditional assembly instruction.
Sample definitions:
#define
#define
#define
TYPE1
L1
Xreg
LABEL_01
%x
#define
CONST (DATA1+DATA2)*2
Expansion rule
If a Define name defined appears in the source, the assembler substitutes a defined character string
for that Define name.
Sample expansion:
#define INT_F1
0xfff0
#define INT_F1_1 0
:
set [INT_F1], INT_F1_1
... Expanded to "set [0xfff0],0".
:
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
65
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
Precautions
• The assembler only permits backward reference of a Define name. Therefore the name definition must
precede the use of it.
• Once a Define name is defined, it cannot be canceled. However, redefinition can be made using
another Define name.
Example:
#define
#define
XL
Xlow XL
%xl
ldb [Xlow],%ba
... Expanded to "ldb [%xl],%ba".
• When the same Define name is defined duplicatedly, a warning message will appear. Until it is
redefined, it is expanded with the original content, and once it is redefined, it is expanded with the
new content.
• No other characters than delimiters (space, tab, line feed, and comma) can be added before and after a
Define name in the source, unless they are enclosed in [ ] or [ ]+. However, an operator or a symbol
mask (@..) can be added to a Define name string without delimiters.
Examples:
#define
INT_F 0xfff
tst
[INT_F1],0 ;tst [0xfff1],0? ... Specification like this is invalid.
#define
L
LABEL
ldb
ldb
%ext,L@h
%xl,L@l
... Replaced with "ldb %ext,LABEL@h".
... Replaced with "ldb %xl,LABEL@l".
• When using an expression in a #define statement, it will be expanded as is. Pay attention when a
number is defined using the #define pseudo-instruction.
Examples:
#define
NUM1 1+1
ld
%a,NUM1*2
... Expanded as "ld %a, 1+1*2" (=3).
... Expanded as "ld %a, (1+1)*2" (=4).
#define
NUM2 (1+1)
ld
%a,NUM2*2
• The internal preprocess part of the assembler does not check the validity of a statement as the result of
the replacement of the character string.
66
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.7.3 Numeric Define Instruction (#defnum)
Instruction format
#defnum <Numeric Define name> <Number>
Function
The #defnum pseudo-instruction is provided for compatibility with the older assembler. In the older
assembler, #defnum is required to define a numeric constant, while #define is for defining a string. In
the new assembler, there is no need to differentiate between a numeric constant and a string.
Therefore the new assembler should use the #define instruction.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
67
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.7.4 Macro Instructions (#macro ... #endm)
Any statement string can be left defined as a macro using the macro instruction (#macro), and the content
of that definition can be invoked from different parts of the program with the macro name. Unlike a
subroutine, the part that is invoking a macro is replaced with the content of the definition.
Instruction format
#macro <Macro name>
<Statement string>
#endm
[<Dummy parameter>] [,<Dummy parameter>] ...
<Macro name>:
• The first character is limited to a–z, A–Z, ? and _.
• The second and the subsequent characters can use a–z, A–Z, 0–9, ? and _.
• Uppercase and lowercase characters are discriminated. (#macro itself is case insensitive.)
When assembling with the "-c" option, all symbols are case insensitive.
• One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between the instruction and the macro name.
<Dummy parameter>:
• Dummy parameter symbols for macro definition. They are described when a macro to be defined
needs parameters.
• One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between the macro name and the first parameter symbol.
When describing multiple parameters, a comma (,) is necessary between one parameter and another.
• The same symbols as for a macro name are available.
• The number of parameters are limited according to the free memory space.
<Statement string>:
• The following statements can be described:
- Basic instruction (mnemonic and operand)
- Conditional assembly instruction
- Internal branch label*
- Comments
• The following statements cannot be described:
- Assembler pseudo-instructions (excluding conditional assembly instruction)
- Other labels than internal branch labels
- Macro invocation
∗ Internal branch label
A macro is spread over to several locations in the source. Therefore, if you describe a label in a macro,
a double definition will result, with an error issued. So, use internal branch labels which are only
valid within a macro.
• The number of internal-branch labels are limited according to the free memory space.
• The same symbols as for a macro name are available.
Sample definition:
#define C_RESET 0b1101
#macro WAIT
COUNT
ld
and
%a,COUNT
%f,C_RESET
LOOP:
nop
jr
LOOP
#endm
68
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
Expansion rules
When a defined macro name appears in the source, the assembler inserts a statement string defined in
that location.
If there are actual parameters described in that process, the dummy parameters will be replaced with
the actual parameters in the same order as the latter are arranged.
The internal branch labels are replaced, respectively, with __L0001 ... from top of the source in the
same order as they appear.
Sample expansion:
When the macro WAIT shown above is defined:
Macro invocation
:
WAIT 15
:
After expansion
:
;WAIT
ld
15
%a,15
and %f,0b1101
__L0001:
nop
jr
__L0001
("__L0001" denotes the case where an internal branch label is expanded for the first time in the source.)
Precautions
• The assembler only permits backward reference of a macro invocation. Therefore the macro definition
must precede the use of it.
• Once a defined macro name is defined, it cannot be canceled. If the same macro name is defined
duplicatedly, a warning message will appear. Until it is redefined, it is expanded with the original
content, and once it is redefined, it is expanded with the new content. Definition should be done with
distinct names, although the program operation will not be affected.
• No other characters than delimiters (space, tab, line feed, and commas) can be added before and after
a dummy parameter in a statement.
• The same character string as that of the define instruction cannot be used as a macro name.
• When the number of dummy parameters differs from that of actual parameters, an error will result.
• The maximum number of parameters and internal branch labels are limited according to the free
memory space.
• "__Lnnnn" used for the internal branch labels should not be employed as other label or symbol.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
69
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.7.5 Conditional Assembly Instructions (#ifdef ... #else ... #endif, #ifndef... #else ... #endif)
A conditional assembly instruction determines whether assembling should be performed within the
specified range, dependent on whether the specified name (Define name) is defined or not.
Instruction formats
Format 1)
#ifdef
[#else
#endif
<Name>
<Statement string 1>
<Statement string 2> ]
If the name is defined, <Statement string 1> will be subjected to the assembling.
If the name is not defined, and #else ... <Statement string 2> is described, then <Statement string 2>
will be subjected to the assembling. #else ... <Statement string 2> can be omitted.
Format 2)
#ifndef
[#else
#endif
<Name>
<Statement string 1>
<Statement string 2> ]
If the name is not defined, <Statement string 1> will be subjected to the assembling.
If the name is defined, and #else ... <Statement string 2> is described, <Statement string 2> will be
subjected to the assembling. #else ... <Statement string 2> can be omitted.
<Name>:
Conforms to the restrictions on Define name. (See #define.)
<Statement string>:
All statements, excluding conditional assembly instructions, can be described.
Sample description:
#ifdef TYPE1
ld
%x,0x12
%x,0x13
#else
ld
#endif
#ifndef SMALL
#define STACK1 0x31
#endif
Name definition
Name definition needs to have been completed by either of the following methods, prior to the
execution of a conditional assembly instruction:
(1) Definition using the start-up option (-d) of the assembler.
Example: as63 -d TYPE1 sample.s
(2) Definition in the source file using the #define instruction.
Example: #define TYPE1
The #define statement is valid even in a file to be included, provided that it goes before the
conditional assembly instruction that uses its Define name. A name defined after a conditional
assembly instruction will be regarded as undefined.
When a name is going to be used only in conditional assembly, no substitute character string
needs to be specified.
70
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
Expansion rule
A statement string subjected to the assembling is expanded according to the expansion rule of the
other preprocessing pseudo-instructions. (If no preprocessing pseudo-instruction is contained, the
statement will be output in a file as is.)
Precaution
A name specified in the condition is evaluated with discrimination between uppercase and lowercase.
When assembling with the "-c" option, all symbols are case insensitive.
The condition is deemed to be satisfied only when there is the same Define name defined.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
71
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.7.6 Section Defining Pseudo-Instructions (.code, .data, .bss)
The section defining pseudo-instructions define one related group of codes or data and make it possible
to relocate by the groups at the later linking stage. Even if these section defining pseudo-instructions are
not used, the section kind will be automatically judged by its contents (however, a warning occurs). If the
new codes or data without section definition are different from the previous code or data kind, they will
be taken as another new section.
.code pseudo-instruction
Instruction format
.code
Function
Declares the start of a CODE section. Statements following this instruction are assembled as those to
be mapped in the code ROM, until another section is declared.
The CODE section is set by default in the assembler. Therefore, the .code pseudo-instruction can be
omitted at top of a source file. Always describe it when you change a section to a CODE section.
Precautions
• A CODE section can be divided among multiple locations of a source file for purpose of definition
(describing the .code pseudo-instruction in the respective start positions).
• A CODE section is relocatable by default unless its location is specified with the .org pseudo-instruc-
tion or more loosely with the .align pseudo-instruction.
.data pseudo-instruction
Instruction format
.data
Function
Declares the start of a DATA section. Statements following this instruction are assembled as those to
be mapped in the data ROM, until another section is declared.
Precautions
• The DATA section is a static data area, and effective only for models with data ROM installed.
• In a DATA section, nothing other than the .org and .word pseudo-instructions, symbols, and com-
ments can be described.
• A DATA section can be divided among multiple locations of a source file for purpose of definition
(describing the .data pseudo-instruction in the respective start positions).
• A DATA section is relocatable by default unless its location is specified with the .org pseudo-instruc-
tion or more loosely with the .align pseudo-instruction.
72
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
.bss pseudo-instruction
Instruction format
.bss
Function
Declares the start of a BSS section. Statements following this instruction are assembled as those to be
mapped in the RAM, until another section is declared.
Precautions
• In a BSS section, nothing else other than the .comm, .lcomm, and .org pseudo-instructions, symbols,
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
73
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.7.7 Location Defining Pseudo-Instructions (.org, .align)
The absolute addressing pseudo-instructions (.align and .org) work to specify absolute location of a
section in different precision such as 2n words alignment level and complete absolute address level.
.org pseudo-instruction
Instruction format
.org
<Address>
<Address>:
Absolute address specification
• Only decimal, binary and hexadecimal numbers can be described.
• The addresses that can be specified are from 0 to 65,535 (0xffff).
• One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between the instruction and the address.
Sample description:
.code
.org
0x0100
Function
Specifies an absolute address location of a CODE, DATA or BSS section in an assembly source file. The
section with the .org pseudo-instruction is taken as an absolute section.
Precautions
• If an overlap occurs as the result of specifying absolute locations with the .org pseudo-instruction, an
error will result.
Examples:
.bss
.org 0x00
.comm RAM0 4 ... RAM secured area (0x00–0x03)
.org 0x01
.comm RAM1 4 ... Error (because the area of 0x01–0x03 is overlapped)
• When the .org pseudo-instruction appears in a section, a new absolute section starts at that point. The
section type does not change. The .org pseudo-instruction keeps its effect only in that section until the
next section definer (.code, .data or .bss) or the next location definer (.org or .align) appears.
Example:
:
.code
... The latest relocatable section definition.
:
.org 0x100
... Starts new absolute CODE section from address 0x100.
... This section is relocatable not affected by the ".org" pseudo-instruction.
... This section is also relocatable not affected by the ".org" pseudo-instruction.
:
.bss
:
.code
:
• If the .org pseudo-instruction is defined immediately after a section definer (.code, .data or .bss), the
section definer does not start a new section. But .org starts a new section with the attribute of the
section definer.
Example:
.code
.org 0x100
:
... This does not start a new CODE section.
... This starts an absolute CODE section.
74
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
75
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
.align pseudo-instruction
Instruction format
.align
<Alignment number>
<Alignment number>:
Word alignment in 2n value
• Only decimal, binary and hexadecimal numbers can be described.
• The alignment that can be specified is a 2n value.
• One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between the instruction and the alignment number.
Sample description:
.code
.align 32
... Sets the location to the next 32-word boundary address.
Function
Specifies location alignment in words of a CODE, DATA or BSS section in an assembly source file. The
section with the .align pseudo-instruction can be taken as a loosely absolute section in the sense that
its location is partially defined.
Precautions
• When the .align pseudo-instruction appears in a section, a new absolute section starts at that point.
The section type does not change. The .align pseudo-instruction keeps its effect only in that section
until the next section definer (.code, .data or .bss) or the next location definer (.org or .align) appears.
Example:
:
.code
... The latest relocatable section definition.
:
.align 32 ... Starts new loosely absolute CODE section from the next 32-word boundary address.
:
.bss
... This section is relocatable not affected by the ".align" pseudo-instruction.
... This section is also relocatable not affected by the ".align" pseudo-instruction.
:
:
.code
• If the .align pseudo-instruction is defined immediately after a section definer (.code, .data or .bss), the
section definer does not start a new section. But .align starts a new section with the attribute of the
section definer.
Example:
.code
... This does not start a new CODE section.
.align 32 ... This starts a loosely absolute CODE section.
:
• If the .align pseudo-instruction is defined immediately before a section definer (.code, .data or .bss), it
does not start a new section and makes no effect to the following sections.
Example:
.code
... The latest relocatable section definition.
:
.align 32 ... This does not start a new absolute section and makes no effect.
.bss
... The another kind (BSS) of section which is not affected by the
previous ".align" pseudo-instruction in the CODE section.
... This will be an relocatable CODE section not affected by the
previous ".align" pseudo-instruction.
:
:
.code
76
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.7.8 Absolute Assembling Pseudo-Instruction (.abs)
Instruction format
.abs
Function
The .abs pseudo-instruction is provided for compatibility with the older assembler. In the older
assembler, this pseudo-instruction is required to specify that a source file uses absolute sections as
opposed to relocatable sections. It is not necessary to use this instruction in the new assembler,
because the new assembler allows the use of absolute and relocatable sections in one source file. Use
the .org or .align pseudo-instruction for defining absolute sections.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
77
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.7.9 Symbol Defining Pseudo-Instruction (.set)
Instruction format
.set
<Symbol>[,] <Value>
<Symbol>:
Symbols for value reference
• The 1st character is limited to a–z, A–Z, ? and _.
• The 2nd and the subsequent character can use a–z, A–Z, 0–9, ? and _.
• Uppercase and lowercase are discriminated.
When assembling with the "-c" option, all symbols are case insensitive.
• One or more spaces, or tabs are necessary between the instruction and the symbol.
<Value>:
Value specification
• Only decimal, binary, and hexadecimal numbers can be described.
• The values that can grammatically be specified are from 0 to 65,535 (0xffff).
• One or more spaces, tabs, or a comma (,) are necessary between the instruction and the value.
Sample description:
.set
.set
DATA1 0x20
STACK1 0x100
Function
Defines a symbol for a value such as an absolute address.
Precaution
When the defined symbol is used as an operand, the defined value is referred as is. Therefore, if the
value exceeds the valid range of the operand, a warning will result.
Example:
.set DATA1 0xff00
ldb %ext,DATA1@h
ldb %xl,DATA1@l
... OK
... OK
ld
%a,DATA1
... Warning
78
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.7.10 Data Defining Pseudo-Instructions (.codeword, .word)
.codeword pseudo-instruction
Instruction format
.codeword
<Data>:
13-bit data
<Data>[,<Data> ...,<Data>]
• Only decimal, binary and hexadecimal numbers can be described.
• The data that can be specified are from 0 to 8,191 (0x1fff).
• One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between the instruction and the first data.
• A comma (,) is necessary between one data and another.
Sample description:
.code
.codeword
0xa,0xa40,0xff3
Function
Defines 13-bit data to be written to the code ROM.
Precaution
The .codeword pseudo-instruction can be used only in CODE sections.
.word pseudo-instruction
Instruction format
.word
<Data>[,<Data> ...,<Data>]
<Data>:
4-bit data
• Only decimal, binary and hexadecimal numbers can be described.
• The data that can be specified are from 0 to 15 (0xf).
• One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between the instruction and the first data.
• A comma (,) is necessary between one data and another.
Sample description:
.data
.word 0xa,0xb,0xc,0xd
Function
Defines 4-bit data to be written to the data ROM.
Precaution
The .word pseudo-instruction can be used only in DATA sections.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
79
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.7.11 Area Securing Pseudo-Instructions (.comm, .lcomm)
Instruction format
.comm <Symbol>[,] <Size>
.lcomm <Symbol>[,] <Size>
<Symbol>:
Symbols for data memory access (address reference)
• The 1st character is limited to a–z, A–Z, ? and _.
• The 2nd and the subsequent character can use a–z, A–Z, 0–9, ? and _.
• Uppercase and lowercase are discriminated.
When assembling with the "-c" option, all symbols are case insensitive.
• One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between instruction and symbol.
<Size>:
Number of words of the area to be secured (4 bits/word)
• Only decimal, binary and hexadecimal numbers can be described.
• The size that can grammatically be specified is from 0 to 65,534.
• One or more spaces, tabs or a comma (,) are necessary between symbol and size.
Sample description:
.bss
.comm RAM0 4
.lcomm BUF,1
Function
Sets an area of the specified size in the BSS section (RAM and other data memory), and creates a
symbol indicating its top address with the specified name. By using this symbol, you can describe an
instruction to access the RAM.
Difference between .comm and .lcomm
The .comm pseudo-instruction and the .lcomm pseudo-instruction are exactly the same in function,
but they do differ from each other in the scope of the symbols they create. The symbols created by the
.comm pseudo-instruction become global symbols, which can be referred to externally from other
modules (however, the file to be referred to needs to be specified by the .global pseudo-instruction.)
The symbols created by the .lcomm pseudo-instruction are local symbols, which cannot be referred to
from other modules.
Precaution
The .comm and .lcomm pseudo-instructions can only be described in BSS sections.
80
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.7.12 Global Declaration Pseudo-Instruction (.global)
Instruction format
.global <Symbol>
<Symbol>:
Symbol to be defined in the current file, or symbol already defined in other module
• One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between the instruction and the symbol.
Sample description:
.global GENERAL_SUB1
Function
Makes global declaration of a symbol. The declaration made in a file with a symbol defined converts
that symbol to a global symbol which can be referred to from other modules. Prior to making refer-
ence, declaration has to be made by this instruction on the side of the file that is going to make the
reference.
4.7.13 List Control Pseudo-Instructions (.list, .nolist)
Instruction format
.list
.nolist
Function
Controls output to the relocatable list file.
The .nolist pseudo-instruction stops output to the relocatable list file after it is issued.
The .list pseudo-instruction resumes from there the output which was stopped by the .nolist pseudo-
instruction.
Precaution
The assembler delivers relocatable list files only when it is started up with the -l option specified.
Therefore, these instructions are invalid, if the -l option was not specified.
4.7.14 Source Debugging Information Pseudo-Instructions (.stabs, .stabn)
Instruction formats
(1) .stabs "<File name>", FileName
(2) .stabn 0, FileEnd
(3) .stabn <Line number>, LineInfo
Function
The assembler outputs object files in IEEE-695 format, including source debugging information
conforming to these instructions. This debugging information is necessary to perform debugging by
Debugger db63, with the assembly source displayed.
Format (1) delivers information on the start position of a file.
Format (2) delivers information on the end position of a file.
Format (3) delivers information on the line No. of an instruction in a source file.
Insertion of debugging information
When the -g option is specified as a start option, the preprocess stage of the assembler will insert
debugging pseudo-instructions in the preprocessed file. Therefore, you do not have to describe these
pseudo-instructions in creating source files.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
81
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.7.15 Comment Adding Function
The preprocessing pseudo-instructions that begin with "#" are all expanded to codes that can be as-
sembled, and delivered in the preprocessed file. Even after that, those instructions are rewritten with
comments beginning with a semicolon (;), so that the original instructions can be identified. However,
note that the replacements of Define names will not subsist as comments.
The comment is added to the first line following the expansion. In case the original statement is accompa-
nied by a comment, that comment is also added.
A macro definition should have a semicolon (;) placed at top of the line.
Example:
• Before expansion
#define
Areg
%a
#macro
ADDX2Y
ld
add
ld
VALUE
Areg, VALUE
Areg, [%x]
[%y], Areg
#endm
ADDX2Y
10h ; MX + 10h -> MY
• After expansion (no debugging information)
;#define Areg
%a
;#macro
ADDX2Y
VALUE
;
;
;
ld
add
ld
Areg, VALUE
Areg, [%x]
[%y], Areg
;#endm
;ADDX2Y
ld
10h ; MX + 10h -> MY
%a, 0x10
add
%a, [%x]
ld
[%y], %a
4.7.16 Priority of Pseudo-Instructions
Some remarks concerning the priority among the preprocessing pseudo-instructions will be given below:
1. The conditional assembly instructions (#ifdef, #ifndef) have the first priority. Nesting cannot be made
of those instructions.
2. Define instruction (#define), include instruction (#include), or macro instruction (#macro) can be
described within a conditional assembly instruction.
3. Define instruction (#define), include instruction (#include), and macro instruction (#macro) cannot be
described within a macro definition.
4. Define name definitions are expanded with priority over macro definitions.
82
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.8 Relocatable List File
The relocatable list file is an assembly source file that carries assembled results (offset addresses and
object codes) added to the first half of each line. It is delivered only when the start-up option (-l) is
specified.
Its file format is a text file, and the file name, <File name>.lst. (The <File name> is the same as that of the
input source file.)
The format of each line of the assembly list file is as follows:
Line No.: Address Code Source statement
Example
Assembler 63 ver x.xx Relocatable List File MAIN.LST Mon Jan 15 12:40:41 2001
1:
2:
3:
; main.s
; AS63 test program (main routine)
;
:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
39:
40:
41:
42:
43:
.org
0x110
BOOT:
LOOP:
0110
0111
0112
0113
0114
0900
1fc4
0900
1fc6
0200
ldb
ldb
ldb
ldb
calr
%ba,SP1_INIT_ADDR
%sp1,%ba
%ba,SP2_INIT_ADDR
%sp2,%ba
; set SP1
; set SP2
; initialize RAM block 1
INIT_RAM_BLK1
0115
0116
0200
0000
calr
jr
INC_RAM_BLK1
LOOP
; increment RAM block 1
; infinity loop
;***** RAM block *****
.org 0x0
.bss
.comm RAM_BLK0, 4
.comm RAM_BLK1, 4
0000
0004
00
00
Content of line No.
The source line number from top of the file will be delivered.
Content of address
In the case of an absolute section, an absolute address will be delivered in hexadecimal number.
In the case of a relocatable section, a relative address will be delivered in hexadecimal number from
top of the file.
Content of code
CODE section: The instruction (machine language) codes are delivered in hexadecimal numbers. One
address corresponds with one instruction. The assembler sets the operand (immediate
data) of the code that refers to unresolved address to 0. The immediate data will be
decided by the linker.
DATA section: The 4-bit data defined by the .word pseudo-instruction are delivered. One address
corresponds with one data.
BSS section:
Irrespective of the size of the secured area, 00 is always delivered here.
Only the address defined for a symbol (top address of the secured area) is delivered as
the address of the BSS section.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
83
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.9 Sample Executions
Command line
C:\EPSON\S1C63\bin\as63 -g -e -l main.s
Assembly source file
; main.s
; AS63 test program (main routine)
;
;***** INITIAL SP1 & SP2 ADDRESS DEFINITION *****
#ifdef SMALL_RAM
.set SP1_INIT_ADDR 0xb
.set SP1_INIT_ADDR 0x4b
;SP1 init addr = 0x2c
#else
;SP1 init addr = 0x12c
;SP2 init addr = 0x1f
#endif
.set SP2_INIT_ADDR 0x1f
;***** NMI & BOOT, LOOP *****
.global INIT_RAM_BLK1
.global INC_RAM_BLK1
; subroutine in sub.s
; subroutine in sub.s
.org
0x100
NMI:
calr
reti
INIT_RAM_BLK1
; initialize RAM block 1
; in NMI(watchdog timer)
.org
0x110
BOOT:
ldb
ldb
ldb
ldb
calr
%ba,SP1_INIT_ADDR
%sp1,%ba
%ba,SP2_INIT_ADDR
%sp2,%ba
; set SP1
; set SP2
; initialize RAM block 1
INIT_RAM_BLK1
LOOP:
calr
jr
INC_RAM_BLK1
LOOP
; increment RAM block 1
; infinity loop
;***** RAM block *****
.org 0x0
.bss
.comm RAM_BLK0, 4
.comm RAM_BLK1, 4
84
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
Preprocessed file
.stabs "C:\EPSON\S1C63\Test\main.s", FileName
; main.s
; AS63 test program (main routine)
;
;***** INITIAL SP1 & SP2 ADDRESS DEFINITION *****
;#ifdef SMALL_RAM
;
.set SP1_INIT_ADDR 0xb
.set SP1_INIT_ADDR 0x4b
;SP1 init addr = 0x2c
;SP1 init addr = 0x12c
;#else
;#endif
.set SP2_INIT_ADDR 0x1f
;SP2 init addr = 0x1f
;***** NMI & BOOT, LOOP *****
.global INIT_RAM_BLK1
.global INC_RAM_BLK1
; subroutine in sub.s
; subroutine in sub.s
.org
0x100
NMI:
.stabn 23, LineInfo
calr
.stabn 24, LineInfo
reti
INIT_RAM_BLK1
; initialize RAM block 1
; in NMI(watchdog timer)
.org
0x110
BOOT:
.stabn 28, LineInfo
ldb
%ba,SP1_INIT_ADDR
.stabn 29, LineInfo
ldb
%sp1,%ba
; set SP1
.stabn 30, LineInfo
ldb
%ba,SP2_INIT_ADDR
.stabn 31, LineInfo
ldb
%sp2,%ba
; set SP2
.stabn 32, LineInfo
calr
INIT_RAM_BLK1
; initialize RAM block 1
LOOP:
.stabn 34, LineInfo
calr
INC_RAM_BLK1
; increment RAM block 1
; infinity loop
.stabn 35, LineInfo
jr
LOOP
;***** RAM block *****
.org
0x0
.bss
.comm
.comm
RAM_BLK0, 4
RAM_BLK1, 4
.stabn 0, FileEnd
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
85
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
Assembly list file
Assembler 63 ver x.xx Relocatable List File MAIN.LST Mon Jan 15 12:40:41 2001
1:
2:
3:
; main.s
; ASM63 test program (main routine)
;
4:
5:
;***** INITIAL SP1 & SP2 ADDRESS DEFINITION *****
6:
7:
#ifdef SMALL_RAM
8:
9:
.set SP1_INIT_ADDR 0xb
.set SP1_INIT_ADDR 0x4b
;SP1 init addr = 0x2c
#else
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
39:
40:
41:
42:
43:
;SP1 init addr = 0x12c
;SP2 init addr = 0x1f
#endif
.set SP2_INIT_ADDR 0x1f
;***** NMI & BOOT, LOOP *****
.global INIT_RAM_BLK1
.global INC_RAM_BLK1
; subroutine in sub.s
; subroutine in sub.s
.org
0x100
NMI:
0100
0101
0200
1ff9
calr
reti
INIT_RAM_BLK1
; initialize RAM block 1
; in NMI(watchdog timer)
.org
0x110
BOOT:
0110
0111
0112
0113
0114
0900
1fc4
0900
1fc6
0200
ldb
ldb
ldb
ldb
calr
%ba,SP1_INIT_ADDR
%sp1,%ba
%ba,SP2_INIT_ADDR
%sp2,%ba
; set SP1
; set SP2
; initialize RAM block 1
INIT_RAM_BLK1
LOOP:
0115
0116
0200
0000
calr
jr
INC_RAM_BLK1
LOOP
; increment RAM block 1
; infinity loop
;***** RAM block *****
.org 0x0
.bss
.comm RAM_BLK0, 4
.comm RAM_BLK1, 4
0000
0004
00
00
Error file
Assembler 63 Ver x.xx Error log file MAIN.ERR Mon Jan 15 12:40:41 2001
Assembler 63 Ver x.xx
Copyright (C) SEIKO EPSON CORP. 1998-2001
Created preprocessed source file MAIN.MS
Created relocatable list file MAIN.LST
Created error log file MAIN.ERR
Created relocatable object file MAIN.O
Assembly 0 error(s) 0 warning(s)
86
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.10 Error/Warning Messages
4.10.1 Errors
When an error occurs, no object file will be generated.
The assembler error messages are delivered/displayed in the following format:
<Source file name> (<Line number>) Error : <Error message>
Example: TEST.S(431) Error: Illegal syntax
∗ Some error messages are displayed without a line number.
The assembler error messages are given below:
Error message
Address out of range
Description
The specified address is out of range.
Cannot open <file kind> file <FILE NAME>
Cannot read <file kind> file <FILE NAME>
Cannot write <file kind> file <FILE NAME>
Directory path length limit
The specified file cannot be opened.
The specified file cannot be read.
Data cannot be written to the file.
The path name length has exceeded the limit.
<directory path length limit> exceeded
Division by zero
The divisor in the expression is 0.
File name length limit <file name length limit>
exceeded
The file name length has exceeded the limit.
Illegal macro label <label>
The internal branch label in macro definition is incorrect.
The macro parameter is illegal.
Illegal macro parameter <parameter>
Illegal syntax
The statement has a syntax error.
Line length limit <line length limit> exceeded
Macro parameter range <macro parameter range>
exceeded
The number of characters in one line has exceeded the limit.
The number of macro parameters has exceeded the limit.
Memory mapping conflict
The address is already used.
Multiple statements on the same line
Nesting level limit <nesting level limit> exceeded
Number of macro labels limit
Two or more statements were described on one line.
Nesting of #include has exceeded the limit.
The number of internal branch labels has exceeded the limit.
<number of macro label limit> exceeded
Out of memory
Cannot secure memory space.
The label is already defined.
The symbol is already defined.
Second definition of label <label>
Second definition of symbol <symbol>
Symbol name length limit <symbol name length limit> The symbol name length has exceeded the limit.
exceeded
Token length limit <token length limit> exceeded
Unexpected character <name>
Unknown label <label>
The token length has exceeded the limit.
An invalid character has been used.
Reference was made to an undefined label.
A nonexistent instruction was used.
Unknown mnemonic <name>
Unknown register <name>
A nonexistent register name was used.
A reference to an undefined symbol was made.
The symbol mask has a description error.
A nonexistent pseudo-instruction was used.
Unknown symbol <name>
Unknown symbol mask <name>
Unsupported directive <directive>
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
87
CHAPTER 4: ASSEMBLER
4.10.2 Warning
When a warning occurs, the assembler will keep on processing, and terminates the processing after
displaying a warning message, unless an error is produced.
The warning message is delivered/displayed in the following formats:
<Source file name> (<Line number>) Warning : <Warning message>
Example: TEST.S(41) : Warning : Expression out of range
The warning messages are given below:
Warning message
Expression out of range
Description
The result of the expression is out of the effective range.
The symbol mask is not defined correctly.
The symbol is already defined.
Invalid symbol mask
Second definition of define symbol <symbol>
Section activation expected, use <.code/.bss>
There is no section definition.
4.11 Precautions
(1) Nesting of the #include pseudo instruction is limited to a maximum 10 levels. If this limit is sur-
passed, an error will result.
(2) A maximum of 64 internal branch labels can be specified per macro and maximum 9999 internal
branch labels can be expanded within one source file. If these limits are exceeded, an error will result.
(3) Other limitations such as the number of sections depend on the free memory space.
88
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 5: LINKER
CHAPTER 5 LINKER
This chapter describes the functions of the linker, lk63.
5.1 Functions
The linker lk63 is a software that generates executable object files. It provides the following functions:
• Puts together multiple object modules to create one executable object file.
• Resolves external reference from one module to another.
• Relocates relative addresses to absolute addresses.
• Delivers debugging information, such as line numbers and symbol information, in the object file
created after linking.
• Capable of outputting a link map file, symbol file, absolute list file and a cross reference file.
• Automatic page correction function (insertion/removal/correction of the "ldb %ext, imm8" branch
extension instruction) for branch instructions.
5.2 Input/Output Files
from Assembler
Linker
Relocatable
ICE
command file object file(s) parameter file
file.o
file.cm
file.par
Linker
lk63
file.abs
file.map
file.sym
file.xrf
Cross
file.als
lk63.err
Link
map file
Symbol
file
Absolute
object file reference file
Absolute
list file
Error file
to Debugger
Fig. 5.2.1 Flow chart
5.2.1 Input Files
Relocatable object file
∗
This file must always be specified in either a command line or a link command file.
File format: Binary file in IEEE-695 format
File name: <File name>.o
(A path can also be specified.)
Description: Object file of individual modules created by the assembler.
Linker command file
File format: Text file
File name: <File name>.cm
(A path can also be specified.)
Description: File to specify the linker options. This makes it possible to reduce typing in a command
line. This file is dispensable if all start-up options can be input in a command line.
ICE parameter file
∗ This file must always be specified in either a command line or a link command file.
File format: Binary file
File name: <File name>.par
(A path can also be specified.)
Description: File to specify the memory mapping and unsupported instruction information of each
S1C63 Family model. This file is provided for each model and commonly used with the
debugger and HEX converter.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
89
CHAPTER 5: LINKER
5.2.2 Output Files
An output file name can be specified in the command line or command file using the -o start-up option. If
no output file name is specified, the same name as that of the relocatable object file to be linked first is
used.
Absolute object file
File format: Binary file in IEEE-695 format
File name: <File name>.abs
Output destination: Current directory
Description: Object file in executable format that can be input to the debugger. All the modules
comprising one program are linked together in the file, and the absolute addresses
that all the codes will map are determined. It also contains the necessary debugging
information in IEEE-695 format.
Link map file
File format: Text file
File name: <File name>.map
Output destination: Current directory
Description: Mapping information file showing from which address of a section each input file
was mapped. This file is output when the -m start-up option is specified.
Symbol file
File format: Text file
File name: <File name>.sym
Output destination: Current directory
Description: Symbols defined in all the modules and their address information are delivered to
this file. This file is delivered when the -s start-up option is specified.
Cross reference file
File format: Text file
File name: <File name>.xrf
Output destination: Current directory
Description: Labels defined in all the modules and their defined and referred addresses are
delivered in this file. This file is delivered when the -x start-up option is specified.
Absolute list file
File format: Text file
File name: <File name>.als
Output destination: Current directory
Description: File delivered when the -l start-up option is specified. The file contents are similar to
the relocatable list file output by the assembler except that the location addresses are
absolute and takes the form of an integrated single file.
Error file
File format: Text file
File name: lk63.err
Output destination: Current directory
Description: The file is created if the -e start-up option is specified. It records the information
which the linker outputs to the Standard Output (stdout), such as error messages.
The file name is "lk63.err" by default, but it can be changed using the -o start-up
option.
90
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 5: LINKER
5.3 Starting Method
General form of command line
lk63 [Options] [<Relocatable object files>] [<Linker command file>] <ICE parameter file>
^
^
^
^
denotes a space.
^
[ ] indicates the possibility to omit.
The order of options and file names can be arbitrary.
File names
Files are identified with their extensions. Therefore, an appropriate extension should be included in
each file name. However, the extension ".o" of the relocatable object file can be omitted.
Relocatable object files: <File name.o>
Linker command file: <File name.cm>
ICE parameter file:
<File name.par>
When using a linker command file, options, relocatable object file names, an ICE parameter file name
and an output file name can be described in the linker command file. If all the items to be specified are
entered in a command line, the linker command file is not necessary.
When linking multiple relocatable object files from a command line, one or more spaces should be
placed between the file names.
For the output file name, specify an absolute object file name (.abs). The file name will be used for
other output files. If no absolute object file name is specified, the same name as that of the relocatable
object file to be linked first is used as the output file name.
The ICE parameter file cannot be omitted.
A long file name supported in Windows and a path name can be specified. When including spaces in
the file name, enclose the file name with double quotation marks (").
Options
The linker comes with the following options:
-d
Function: Disable full branch optimization
Explanation: Disables automatic insertion/deletion/correction of the extension codes (ldb
%ext, imm8) for branch instructions (jumps and calls).
Default: If this option is not specified, the branch optimization function will be enabled.
Note: In the previous version, omission of the -d option enables automatic insertion and
correction of the extension codes, note, however, that deletion of the extension
codes must be enabled using the -er option. The current version has no -er option
and the deletion function is enabled by default. Conversely, the -dr option must
be specified to disable the deletion function. Be aware of this difference when
using a project created in the previous version in particular.
-di
Function: Disable insertion of branch extension
Explanation: Disables extension code insertion when the branch optimization function (inser-
tion/deletion/correction) is enabled.
Default: If this option is not specified, necessary extension codes will be inserted when the
full branch optimization function is specified.
-dr
Function: Disable removal branch optimization
Explanation: Disables extension code deletion when the branch optimization function (inser-
tion/deletion/correction) is enabled. This will be needed when at least the
existing extension codes should not be removed.
Default: If this option is not specified, unnecessary extension codes will be removed when
the full branch optimization function is specified.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
91
CHAPTER 5: LINKER
-e
Function: Output of error file
Explanation: Creates an .err file which contains the information that the linker outputs to the
Standard Output (stdout), such as error messages.
Default: If this option is not specified, no error file will be created.
-g
Function: Addition of debugging information
Explanation: • Creates an absolute object file containing debugging information.
• Always specify this function when you perform source display or use the
symbolic debugging facility of the debugger.
Default: If this option is not specified, no debugging information will be added to the
absolute object file.
-l
Function: Output of absolute list file
Explanation: Outputs an absolute list file.
Default: If this option is not specified, no absolute list file will be output.
-m
Function: Output of link map file
Explanation: Outputs a link map file.
Default: If this option is not specified, no link map file will be output.
-o <file name>
Function: Specification of output path/file name
Explanation: Specifies an output path/file name without extension or with an extension ".abs".
If no extension is specified, ".abs" will be supplemented at the end of the specified
output path/file name.
Default: The 1st input file name is used for the output file names.
-s
-x
Function: Output of symbol file
Explanation: Outputs a symbol file.
Default: If this option is not specified, no symbol file will be output.
Function: Output of cross reference file
Explanation: Outputs a cross reference file.
Default: If this option is not specified, no cross reference file will be output.
-code <address>
Function: Set up of a relocatable CODE section start address
Explanation: • Sets the absolute start address of a relocatable CODE section. Absolute sections
remain unaffected.
• CODE sections are mapped in succession from this address, unless otherwise
specified.
• One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between -code and <address>.
• The address should be described in hexadecimal format (0xnnnn).
Default: If this option is not specified, the CODE section will begin from the code ROM
physical start address specified with the ICE parameter file.
Sample description: -code 0x100
-data <address>
Function: Set up of a relocatable DATA section start address
Explanation: • Sets the absolute start address of a relocatable DATA section. Absolute sections
remain unaffected.
• DATA sections are mapped in succession from this address, unless otherwise
specified.
• One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between -data and <address>.
• The address should be described in hexadecimal format (0xnnnn).
Default: If this option is not specified, the DATA section will begin from the data ROM
physical start address specified with the ICE parameter file.
Sample description: -data 0x8000
92
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 5: LINKER
-bss <address>
Function: Set up of a relocatable BSS section start address
Explanation: • Sets the absolute start address of a relocatable BSS section. Absolute sections
remain unaffected.
• BSS sections are mapped in succession from this address, unless otherwise
specified.
• One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between -bss and <address>.
• The address should be described in hexadecimal format (0xnnnn).
Default: If this option is not specified, the BSS section will begin from the RAM physical
start address specified with the ICE parameter file.
Sample description: -bss 0x000
-rcode <file name>=<address>
Function: Set up of the file-specific CODE section start address
Explanation: • Sets the absolute address to map the CODE section of the specified module.
This command serves to specify a module having a code to be fixed at a specific
address, such as the interrupt vector. Absolute sections in the specified file
remain unaffected.
• One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between -rcode and <file name>.
• The address should be described in hexadecimal format (0xnnnn).
Default: If this option is not specified, the CODE section of each module is mapped
continuously from the address that was set by the -code option.
Sample description: -rcode test1.o = 0x0110
-rdata <file name>=<address>
Function: Set up of the file-specific DATA section start address
Explanation: • Sets the absolute address to map the DATA section of the specified module.
This command serves to specify a module having data to be fixed at a specific
address of the data ROM. Absolute sections in the specified file remain unaf-
fected.
• One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between -rdata and <file name>.
• The address should be described in hexadecimal format (0xnnnn).
Default: If this option is not specified, the DATA section of each module is mapped
continuously from the address that was set by the -data option.
Sample description: -rdata test1.o = 0x8100
-rbss <file name>=<address>
Function: Set up of the file-specific BSS section start address
Explanation: • Sets the absolute address to map the BSS section of the specified module. This
command serves to specify a module having a symbol to be fixed at a specific
address of the RAM. Absolute sections in the specified file remain unaffected.
• One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between -rbss and <file name>.
• The address should be described in hexadecimal format (0xnnnn).
Default: If this option is not specified, the BSS section of each module is mapped continu-
ously from the address that was set by the -bss command.
Sample description: -rbss test1.o = 0x100
-defsym <symbol name>=<address>
Function: Specification of a global symbol address
Explanation: • The absolute address of a global symbol is given for the referencing side.
• The symbols to be specified with this option should not be defined in the
source as an actual address label that can be referred to.
• One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between -defsym and <symbol
name>.
Sample description: -defsym BOOT = 0x100
When inputting an option in the command line, one or more spaces are necessary before and after the
option.
Examples: c:\epson\s1c63\bin\lk63 -defsym INIT=0x200 test.cm par63xxx.par
c:\epson\s1c63\bin\lk63 -g -e -s -m test1.o test2.o -o test.abs par63xxx.par
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
93
CHAPTER 5: LINKER
5.4 Messages
The linker delivers all its messages to the Standard Output (stdout).
Start-up message
The linker outputs only the following message when it starts up.
Linker 63 Ver x.xx
Copyright (C) SEIKO EPSON CORP. 1998-2001
End message
The linker outputs the following messages to indicate which files has been created when it ends
normally.
Created absolute object file <FILENAME.ABS>
Created absolute list file <FILENAME.ALS>
Created map file <FILENAME.MAP>
Created symbol file <FILENAME.SYM>
Created cross reference file <FILENAME.XRF>
Created error log file <FILENAME.ERR>
Link 0 error(s) 0 warning(s)
Usage output
If no file name was specified or an option was not specified correctly, the linker ends after delivering
the following message concerning the usage:
Usage: lk63 [options] <file names>
Options: -d
-dr
Disable full branch optimization
Disable removal branch optimization
Output error log file (.ERR)
Add source debug information
Output absolute list file (.ALS)
Output map file (.MAP)
-e
-g
-l
-m
-o <file name>
-s
-x
-code <address>
-data <address>
-bss <address>
Specify output file name
Output symbol file (.SYM)
Output cross reference file (.XRF)
Specify CODE start address
Specify DATA start address
Specify BSS start address
-rcode <file name>=<address> Specify CODE start address of the file
-rdata <file name>=<address> Specify DATA start address of the file
-rbss <file name>=<address> Specify BSS start address of the file
-defsym <symbol>=<address> Define symbol address
File names: Relocatable object file (.O)
Command parameter file (.CM)
ICE parameter file (.PAR)
When error/warning occurs
If an error takes place, an error message will appear before the end message shows up.
Example:
Error: Cannot create absolute list file TEST.ABS
Link 1 error(s) 0 warning(s)
In the case of an error, the linker ends without creating an output file.
If a warning is issued, a warning message will appear before the end message shows up.
Example:
Warning: No debug information in TEST.O
Link 0 error(s) 1 warning(s)
In the case of a warning, the linker ends after creating an output file, but the result cannot be guaran-
teed.
For details on errors and warnings, refer to Section 5.12, "Error/Warning Messages".
94
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 5: LINKER
5.5 Linker Command File
To simplify the keystroke in the command line at the time of start up, execute the link processing through
the linker by inputting a linker command file (.cm) that holds the necessary specifications (any options
and file names) described.
Sample linker command file
-e
; Generate error file
-g
; Add debug information
-code 0x0100
; Fix CODE section start address
-rcode test2.o = 0x0110; Fix CODE section start position of test2.o
-data 0x8000
-bss 0x00e0
; Fix DATA section start address
; Fix BSS section start address
-defsym IO = 0xFF00
; Set global symbol
-o test.abs
test1.o
test2.o
; Specify output file name
; Specify input file 1
; Specify input file 2
Create the linker command file with the following rules:
File format
The linker command file is a general text format as shown above.
".cm" should be used for the file name extension.
Option description
All options should begin with a hyphen (-). Each individual option needs to be delineated with more
than one space, tab, or line feed. For better visibility, it is recommended to describe each option in a
separate line.
Notes: • A numeric value to specify an address should be described in the hexadecimal format (0xnnnn).
Decimal and binary notations will not be accepted.
• When an option that is only permitted in single setting is specified in a duplicated manner, the
last entered option will be effective.
Example: -code 0x0000
-code 0x0100
... -code 0x0100 is effective.
Input file specification
Describe the relocatable object file names at the end of the link command file. The mapping by linking
takes place in described order, unless otherwise specified.
The extension (.o) of the relocatable object files can be omitted.
Comment
A comment can be described in the linker command file.
As in the source file, the character string from a semicolon (;) to the end of the line is regarded as a
comment.
Blank line
A blank line carrying only blank characters and a line feed will be ignored. It need not be converted to
a comment using a semicolon.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
95
CHAPTER 5: LINKER
5.6 Link Map File
The link map file serves to refer to the mapping information for the modules of each section. It is output
if the -m option is specified.
The file format is a text file, and its file name is "<File name>.map". (<File name> is the same as that of
the output object file.)
Sample link map file
Linker 63 ver x.xx Link map file TEST.MAP Mon Jan 15 12:40:41 2001
CODE section map of TEST.ABS
Index Start End
Size
Opt Type File
SecNbr
1
0: 0x0000 0x000d 0x000e +0 Rel SUB.S
1: 0x000e 0x00ff 0x00f2 --- --- ------------ ---
2: 0x0100 0x0102 0x0003 +1 Abs MAIN.S
3: 0x0103 0x010f 0x000d --- --- ------------ ---
4: 0x0110 0x0118 0x0009 +2 Abs MAIN.S
1
2
5: 0x0119 0x1fff 0x1ee7 --- --- ------------ ---
Total: 0x1a occupied, 0x1fe6 blank
BSS section map of TEST.ABS
Index Start End
Size
Type File
SecNbr
3
0: 0x0000 0x0007 0x0008 Rel MAIN.S
1: 0x0008 0xf2bf ------ --- ------------ ---
2: 0xf800 0xf8ff ------ --- ------------ ---
3: 0xff00 0xffff ------ --- ------------ ---
Total: 0x8 occupied, 0xf4b8 blank
Contents of link map file
Index
Start
End
Indicates the index number of the section.
Indicates the start address of the section.
Indicates the end address of the section.
Size
Opt
Indicates the size of the section.
Indicates the number of extension codes that are inserted or removed.
Indicates the section type: Rel = relocatable section and Abs = absolute section.
Indicates the file names of the linked module.
Type
File
SecNbr Indicates the section number.
Total
Indicates the total map size and the unused area size.
"---" in the Size, Opt, Type, File and SecNbr columns indicate that no section is allocated.
96
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 5: LINKER
5.7 Symbol File
The symbol file serves to refer to the symbols defined in all the modules and their address information. It
is delivered if the -s start-up option is specified.
The file format is a text file, and its file name is "<File name>.sym". (<File name> is the same as that of the
output object file.)
Sample symbol file
Linker 63 ver x.xx Symbol file TEST.SYM Mon Jan 15 12:40:41 2001
CODE section labels of TEST.ABS
Address Type File
Symbol
0x0110 Local "MAIN.O" .... BOOT
0x0007 Global "SUB.O" ..... INC_RAM_BLK1
0x0000 Global "SUB.O" ..... INIT_RAM_BLK1
0x0116 Local "MAIN.O" .... LOOP
0x0100 Local "MAIN.O" .... NMI
BSS section labels of TEST.ABS
Address Type File
Symbol
0x0000 Global "MAIN.O" .... RAM_BLK0
0x0004 Global "MAIN.O" .... RAM_BLK1
Contents of symbol file
Symbol Indicates all the defined symbols in alphabetical order.
Address Indicates the absolute address defined for the symbol.
Type
File
Indicates the scope of the symbol: Global or Local.
Indicates the object file in which the symbol has been defined.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
97
CHAPTER 5: LINKER
5.8 Absolute List File
The absolute list file is an assembly source file that carries the absolute addresses and object codes added
to the first half of each line. It is delivered only when the -l option is specified. Its file format is a text file,
and the file name is <file name>.als. (The <file name> is the same as that of the output object file.) While
a relocatable list file can be made for each assembly source file, the absolute list file is made as a single
file integrating all the linked objects and their according sources.
Sample absolute list file
Linker 63 ver x.xx Absolute list file TEST.ALS Mon jan 15 12:40:41 2001
1:
2:
; sub.s
; AS63 test program (subroutine)
3:
4:
.global RAM_BLK1
5:
6:
;***** RAM block 1 initialize *****
7:
8:
9:
.global INIT_RAM_BLK1
INIT_RAM_BLK1:
10:
11:
12:
:
0000
0001
0002
:
0800
0a04
1e90
:
ldb
ldb
ld
%ext,RAM_BLK1@h
%xl,RAM_BLK1@l
[%x]+,0x0
;set RAM_BLK1 address to x
:
55:
56:
57:
58:
59:
60:
61:
62:
63:
64:
65:
66:
:
.org
0x110
BOOT:
LOOP:
0110
0111
0112
0113
0114
0115
094b
1fc4
091f
1fc6
08fe
02ea
ldb
ldb
ldb
ldb
ldb ext,fe
calr
%ba,SP1_INIT_ADDR
%sp1,%ba
%ba,SP2_INIT_ADDR
; set SP1
%sp2,%ba
; set SP2
(+)
(+)
INIT_RAM_BLK1
; initialize RAM block 1
0116
0117
0118
:
08fe
02ef
00fd
:
ldb ext,fe
calr
jr
INC_RAM_BLK1
LOOP
; increment RAM block 1
; infinity loop
:
Contents of absolute list file
The format of each line of the absolute list file is as follows:
Line No. Absolute address Code Source statement
Line No. Indicates the line number from the top of the file.
Address Indicates the absolute address after the instruction is allocated.
Code
Indicates the object code.
Source
The contents of the assembly source file are delivered.
Results of branch optimization (extension code insertion/deletion/correction)
As the result of branch optimization, extension codes (ldb %ext, imm8) may be coded without accor-
dance to the source part. To show the result of such code optimizations clearly, the following descrip-
tion will be made on an absolute list file.
When an extension code is inserted:
"(+)" is placed to the right of the code part. There is no original source for the code but the disas-
sembled "ldb %exe, imm8" is delivered at the source part.
When an extension code is deleted:
"(-)" is placed to the left of the original source part. The original statement appears at the source
part in the list file but no code is delivered.
When the operand of an extension code is corrected:
"(*)" is placed to the left of the source statement.
Instructions preprocessed in the assembler
The instructions expanded in the assembler (macros and include sources) are listed with a "+".
98
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 5: LINKER
5.9 Cross Reference File
The cross reference file enumerates all the address labels with their absolute addresses and all the ad-
dresses where the address labels are referred to. It is delivered only when the -x option is specified. Its file
format is a text file, and the file name is <file name>.xrf. (The <file name> is the same as that of the
output object file.)
Sample cross reference file
Linker 63 ver x.xx Cross reference file TEST.XRF Mon Jan 15 12:40:41 2001
Label "INIT_RAM_BLK1" at 0x0000 SUB.O CODE, Global
0x0101 MAIN.O CODE
0x0115 MAIN.O CODE
Label "RAM_BLK0" at 0x000 MAIN.O BSS, Global
0x0101 MAIN.O CODE
0x0115 MAIN.O CODE
Label "RAM_BLK1" at 0x004 MAIN.O BSS, Global
0x0000 SUB.O CODE
0x0001 SUB.O CODE
0x0007 SUB.O CODE
0x0008 SUB.O CODE
Label "INC_RAM_BLK1" at 0x0007 "SUB.O" CODE, Global
0x0117 MAIN.O CODE
Label "NMI" at 0x0100 MAIN.O CODE, Local
Label "BOOT" at 0x0110 MAIN.O CODE, Local
Label "LOOP" at 0x0116 MAIN.O CODE, Local
0x0118 MAIN.O CODE
Contents of cross reference file
The format of each label information is as follows:
Label information
<Address> <File name> <Type>
Label information
Indicates the following information:
• Label name
• Defined address
• Object file in which the label is defined.
• Section type
• Scope
Address Indicates the address where the label is referred.
File
Indicates the object file in which the label is referred.
Type
Indicates the type of section that contains the address where the label is referred.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
99
CHAPTER 5: LINKER
5.10 Linking
Linking rules
The linking process takes place in conformity with the following rules:
• Absolute sections are mapped ahead of relocatable sections, according to the absolute addresses
which were defined at the time of assembling. If an absolute section exceeds the available memory
area, an error will occur.
• The relocatable sections in the file of which the section start address was specified with an option
(-rcode, -rdata, -rbss) are mapped from the specified address. Other relocatable sections are mapped
from top of the relocatable CODE/DATA/BSS section.
• Basically, the relocatable sections except those that are specified with the -rcode, -rdata or -rbss option
are arranged successively in the order of processing. However, if a relocatable section cannot be
mapped subsequent to the previous mapped section, for instance, there is unused area indicated by
the ICE parameter file or an already mapped absolute section, the linker searches another area to map
the section. If there is no available area, an error will occur. A section is not divided into two or more
blocks when it is mapped.
After that, another section may be mapped in the vacant area if it is possible to map there.
Restrictions on linking
Note that all sections may not be mapped depending on each section size or address specifications
even if the relocatable object size is within the available memory size.
Example of linking
A sample case where two relocatable object files, "test1.o" and "test2.o", are linked together under the
following condition is described further below.
Memory configuration of the model
Code ROM:
Data ROM:
RAM:
0x0000 to 0x1fff
0x8000 to 0x87ff
0x0000 to 0x07ff
Display, I/O memory: 0xf000 to 0xffff
Relocatable object files
test1.o
test2.o
CODE1 (relocatable)
CODE2 (absolute 0x0100–) (.org is used.)
DATA1 (relocatable)
CODE3 (relocatable)
CODE4 (relocatable)
DATA2 (absolute 0x8400–)
(.org is used.)
BSS1
BSS2
(relocatable)
(absolute 0xf000–) (.org is used.)
BSS3
BSS4
(absolute 0xff00–)
(relocatable)
Fig. 5.10.1 Structure of sample relocatable files
Sample linker command file
-code 0x0000
; Relocatable CODE section start address
-rcode test2.o = 0x0110; CODE section start address of test2.o
-data 0x8000
-bss 0x0000
; Relocatable DATA section start address
; Relocatable BSS section start address
-rbss test2.o = 0x0400 ; BSS section start address of test2.o
-o test.abs
test1.o
test2.o
; Output file name
; Input file 1
; Input file 2
When linking is executed with the commands defined above, the linker maps the sections of each
module in the manner graphically presented in Figure 5.10.2.
100
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 5: LINKER
test1.o
test.abs
0x0000
0x0100
0x0110
CODE1 (relocatable)
CODE2 (absolute 0x0100–)
DATA1 (relocatable)
BSS1
BSS2
0x00ff
CODE2
0x010f
CODE3
CODE4
(relocatable)
(absolute 0xf000–)
Code ROM area
test2.o
CODE3 (relocatable)
CODE1
CODE4 (relocatable)
DATA2 (absolute 0x8400–)
0x1fff
BSS3
BSS4
(absolute 0xff00–)
(relocatable)
0x8000
0x8400
DATA1
DATA2
0x83ff
0x87ff
Data ROM area
RAM area
0x0000
0x0400
BSS1
BSS4
0x03ff
0x07ff
0xf000
BSS4
BSS3
Display memory
I/O memory area
0xfeff
0xffff
0xff00
Fig. 5.10.2 Example of linking
The absolute sections CODE2, BSS2, DATA2 and BSS3 are mapped to the location specified in the
source files.
The start addresses of the CODE and BSS relocatable sections in "test2.o" is specified by the -rcode and
-rbss options, so CODE3 is mapped from address 0x0110 and CODE 4 follows CODE3. BSS4 is
mapped from address 0x0400.
Since the start addresses of the relocatable CODE, DATA and BSS sections in "test1.o" have not been
specified, they are mapped from the relocatable section start addresses specified by the -code, -data
and -bss options. First the linker will try to map CODE1 from address 0x0000 to address 0x00ff. If
CODE 1 is smaller than 0x100 words, CODE1 can be mapped from address 0x0000. In this example,
CODE1 is mapped behind CODE4 because CODE1 is larger than 0x100 words.
DATA1 is mapped from address 0x8000 and BSS1 is mapped from address 0x0000.
A section cannot be overlapped to other sections, therefore an error will occur if there is no free area
larger than the section size. For example, an error will occur if CODE2 is larger than 0x10 words.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
101
CHAPTER 5: LINKER
5.11 Branch Optimization Function
The PC relative branch instructions (jr, jrc, jrnc, jrz, jrnz and calr) need an address extension instruction
(ldb %ext, imm8) when the relative distance to the destination address exceeds the -127 to 128 range.
Since the location of relocatable sections is not decided until the linking process is completed, the linker
has a function that automatically inserts, removes or corrects the extension codes. This makes it possible
to omit the address extension instruction in the source. However, this function is valid only for the branch
instructions that use a label to specify the destination address.
This branch optimization function (automatically insertion/deletion/correction of the extension codes) is
enabled by default and the branch codes will be optimized unless otherwise specified. All the insertion/
deletion/correction functions can be disabled by specifying the -d option. The -di and -dr options can
also be specified to disable the extension code insertion and deletion functions, respectively (if the -d
option is not specified).
The linker checks the distance from a PC relative branch instruction code to the branch destination label,
and inserts, removes or corrects the extension codes according to the check results.
(1) When the branch destination is located within the -127 to +128 range from the branch instruction:
If the branch instructon code does not have an extension code, no extension code is inserted.
If the branch instruction has an extension code, it is removed (if the -dr option is specified, existing
expansion code will not be removed).
Examples:
jr
ldb %ext,LABEL@rh
calr LABEL@rl
LABEL
→
jr
LABEL
→
calr LABEL@rl
(2) When the branch destination is located outside the -127 to +128 range from the branch instruction:
If the branch instructon code does not have an extension code, an appropriate extension code is
inserted.
If the branch instruction has an illegal extension code, it is replaced with a correct extension code.
Examples:
jr
LABEL
→
→
ldb
jr
%ext,LABEL@rh
LABEL@rl
ldb %ext,LABEL1@rh
calr LABEL2@rl
ldb %ext,LABEL2@rh
calr LABEL2@rl
Unused memory spaces may be generated between sections caused by the branch optimization. In this
case the linker moves the relocatable section following an unused area toward a lower address so that the
codes are embedded in the unused area.
Note: In the previous version, omission of the -d option enables automatic insertion and correction of the
extension codes, note, however, that deletion of the extension codes must be enabled using the -er
option. The current version has no -er option and all the insertion/deletion/correction functions are
enabled by default. To disable the deletion and insertion functions when the -d option is omitted,
the -dr option and -di option must be specified, respectively. Be aware that the current version may
generate an object different from that of the previous version because the current version uncondi-
tionally deletes unnecessary extension codes when the project for the previous version with no -d
option is processed. Specify the -dr option to generate the same optimized codes as the previous
version.
102
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 5: LINKER
5.12 Error/Warning Messages
5.12.1 Errors
When an error occurs, the linker will immediately terminate the processing after displaying an error
message. No object file will be output. Other files will be delivered only in the part which was processed
prior to the occurrence of the error.
The error messages are given below.
Error message
Branch destination too far from <address>
CALZ for non zero page at <address>
Cannot create absolute object file <FILE NAME>
Cannot open <file kind> file <FILE NAME>
Cannot read <file kind> file <FILE NAME>
Cannot relocate <section kind> section of
<FILE NAME>
Description
The branch destination address is out of range.
The specified address is out of the range (0x0000–0x00ff).
The absolute object file cannot be created.
The file cannot be opened.
The file cannot be read.
The relocatable section cannot be allocated.
Cannot write <file kind> file <FILE NAME>
Illegal address range <address> for a code at
<address>
Data cannot be written to the file.
The address specified by TST/SET/CLR is out of the range
(0x0000–0x003f or 0xffC0–0xffff).
Illegal file name <FILE NAME>
Illegal file name <FILE NAME> specified with
option <option>
The file name is incorrect.
The file name specified with the option is incorrect.
Illegal ICE parameter at line <line number> of
<FILE NAME>
The ICE parameter file contains an illegal parameter setting.
Illegal object <FILE NAME>
The input file is not an object file in IEEE-695 format.
An illegal option is specified.
Illegal option <option>
No address specified with option <option>
No code to locate
Address is not specified with the option.
There is no valid code for mapping.
ICE parameter file is not specified.
No ICE parameter file specified
No name and address specified with option <option> Name and address are not specified with the option.
No object file specified
Out of memory
Object files to be linked are not specified.
Cannot secure memory space.
<section kind> section <address>-<address> overlaps The address range of the section overlaps with another
with <section kind> section <address>-<address> section's address range.
<section kind> section <address>-<address> overlaps The address range of the section overlaps with the
with the unavailable memory
unavailable memory.
Unresolved external <label> in <FILE NAME>
Unusable instruction code <instruction code>
in <FILE NAME>
Reference was made to an undefined symbol.
The object contains an instruction invalid for the model.
5.12.2 Warning
Even when a warning appears, the linker continues with the processing. It completes the processing after
displaying a warning message, unless, in addition, an error takes place. The output files will all be
delivered, but the operation of the program cannot be guaranteed.
The warning messages and their contents are given below.
Warning message
Cannot create <file kind> file <FILE NAME>
Cannot open <file kind> file <FILE NAME>
No debug information in <FILE NAME>
No symbols found
Description
The file cannot be created.
The file cannot be opened.
Debugging information is not included in the file.
Symbols cannot be found.
Second definition of label <label> in
<FILE NAME>
The label has already been defined.
Second ICE parameter file <FILE NAME> ignored
Two or more ICE parameter files are specified.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
103
CHAPTER 5: LINKER
5.13 Precautions
(1) Upper limits, such as a maximum section count and the number of objects to be linked, depend on the
free memory space.
(2) To load the absolute object file created by the linker to the debugger, the same ICE parameter file must
be specified when the debugger is invoked.
(3) In the previous version, omission of the -d option enables automatic insertion and correction of the
extension codes, note, however, that deletion of the extension codes must be enabled using the -er
option. The current version has no -er option and all the insertion/deletion/correction functions are
enabled by default. To disable the deletion and insertion functions when the -d option is omitted, the -
dr option and -di option must be specified, respectively. Be aware that the current version may
generate an object different from that of the previous version because the current version uncondition-
ally deletes unnecessary extension codes when the project for the previous version with no -d option
is processed. Specify the -dr option to generate the same optimized codes as the previous version.
104
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 6: HEX CONVERTER
CHAPTER 6 HEX CONVERTER
This chapter describes the functions of hex converter, hx63.
6.1 Functions
The hex converter hx63 converts an absolute object file in IEEE-695 format output from the linker into a
hex file in Motorola-S format or Intel-HEX format. This conversion is needed when debugging the
program with the ROM or when creating mask data using the mask data checker.
When creating the ROM-image hex data, the hex converter fills the unused area of each model with 0xff.
6.2 Input/Output Files
from Linker
Absolute
object file
ICE
parameter file
file.abs
file.par
Hex Converter
hx63
Intel-HEX
format files
Motorola-S
format files
fileh.hex
file.hsa
hx63.err
Error file
or
filel.hex
filec.hex
file.lsa
file.csa
ROM or Mask data creation
Fig. 6.2.1 Flow chart
6.2.1 Input Files
Absolute object file
File format: Binary file in IEEE-695 format
File name: <File name>.abs
(A path can also be specified.)
Description: Absolute object file created by the linker.
ICE parameter file
File format: Binary file
File name: <File name>.par
∗ This file must always be specified.
(A path can also be specified.)
Description: File to specify the memory mapping information of each S1C63 Family model. This
file is provided for each model and is commonly used with the linker and debugger.
6.2.2 Output Files
Hex file
File format: Text file in Motorola-S format or Intel-HEX format
File name: Motorola-S format <File name>.hsa, <File name>.lsa and <File name>.csa
Intel-HEX format
Output destination: Current directory
<File name>h.hex, <File name>l.hex and <File name>c.hex
Description: Three hex files are generated: ".hsa" or "h.hex" that contains the five high-order bits
of the object codes with 0b000 extended, ".lsa" or "l.hex" that contains the eight low-
order bits and ".csa" or "c.hex" that contains four-bit data for the data ROM.
Motorola-S format files are delivered by default. Intel-HEX format files can be
specified using the -i option.
Error file
File format: Text file
File name: hx63.err
Output destination: Current directory
Description: The file is created if the -e start-up option is specified. It records information that the
hex converter outputs to the Standard Output (stdout), such as error messages. The
file name is "hx63.err" by default, but it can be changed using the -o start-up option.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
105
CHAPTER 6: HEX CONVERTER
6.3 Starting Method
General form of command line
hx63 [Options] <Absolute object file name> <ICE parameter file name>
^
^
^
denotes a space.
^
[ ] indicates the possibility to omit.
The order of options and file names can be arbitrary.
File names
Absolute object file: <File name>.abs
ICE parameter file: <File name>.par
The extension of an absolute object file can be omitted. The ICE parameter file must be specified with
its extension.
A long file name supported in Windows and a path name can be specified. When including spaces in
the file name, enclose the file name with double quotation marks (").
Options
The hex converter comes provided with the following four start-up options:
-b
Function: Conversion of existing codes only
Explanation: Converts and delivers only the object codes that exist in the specified absolute object
file. Data for unused addresses is not delivered.
Default: If this option is not specified, the hex data for the entire available memory range
of the model is delivered to the output file. Unused addresses are filled with 0xff.
-e
Function: Output of error files
Explanation: Creates an .err file which contains the information that the hex converter outputs
to the Standard Output (stdout), such as error messages.
Default: If this option is not specified, no error file will be created.
-i
Function: Conversion into Intel-HEX format
Explanation: Generates the hex files ("h.hex", "l.hex" and "c.hex") in Intel-HEX format.
Default: If this option is not specified, Motorola-S format files (".hsa", ".lsa" and ".csa") are
generated.
-o <file name>
Function: Specification of output path/file name
Explanation: Specifies an output path/file name without extension or with an extension ".hsa",
".lsa", ".csa", "h.hex", "l.hex" or "c.hex". By specifying only one file name, three hex
files will be generated.
If no extension is specified, an appropriate extension will be supplemented at the
end of the specified output path/file name. In this case, ".hsa", ".lsa" or ".csa" is
added to the output file name. If Intel-HEX format is specified, "h.hex", "l.hex" or
"c.hex" is added to the output file name. It may change a DOS file name (8
characters max.) to a long file name for Windows.
Default: The input file name is used for the output file names.
When entering an option in the command line, one or more spaces are necessary before and after the
option.
Example: c:\epson\s1c63\bin\hx63 -e test.abs par63xxx.par
106
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 6: HEX CONVERTER
6.4 Messages
The hex converter delivers all its messages via the Standard Output (stdout).
Start-up message
The hex converter outputs only the following message when it starts up.
Hex converter 63 Ver x.xx
Copyright (C) SEIKO EPSON CORP. 1998-2001
End message
The hex converter outputs the following messages to indicate which files have been created when it
ends normally.
Created hex file <FILE NAME>.HSA
Created hex file <FILE NAME>.LSA
Created hex file <FILE NAME>.CSA
Created error log file HX63.ERR
Hex conversion 0 error(s) 0 warning(s)
Usage output
If no file name was specified or an option was not specified correctly, the hex converter ends after
delivering the following message concerning the usage:
Usage: hx63 [options] <file names>
Options: -b
Do not fill unused memory with 0xff
Output error log file (HX63.ERR)
Use Intel Hex format
-e
-i
-o <file name> Specify output file name
File names: Absolute object file (.ABS)
ICE parameter file (.PAR)
When error/warning occurs
If an error occurs, an error message will appear before the end message shows up.
Example:
Error : No ICE parameter file specified
Hex conversion 1 error(s) 0 warning(s)
In the case of an error, the hex converter ends without creating an output file.
If a warning is issued, a warning message will appear before the end message shows up.
Example:
Warning : Output file name conflict
Hex conversion 0 error(s) 1 warning(s)
In the case of a warning, the hex converter ends after creating the output files, but the result cannot be
guaranteed.
For details on errors and warnings, refer to Section 6.6 "Error/Warning Messages".
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
107
CHAPTER 6: HEX CONVERTER
6.5 Output Hex Files
6.5.1 Hex File Configuration
Since each S1C63000 instruction has a 13-bit code, the hex converter always generates two hex files for the
high-order data and the low-order data of the program code. The low-order data hex file (".lsa" or "l.hex")
contains the low-order bytes (bits 7 to 0) of the object codes. The high-order data hex file (".hsa" or
"h.hex") contains the high-order bytes (bits 12 to 8 suffixed by high-order bits 0b000).
4-bit data for the data ROM is output to the ".csa" or "c.hex" file.
By specifying the -i option, the hex converter can convert the absolute object file into Intel-HEX files as
well as Motorola-S format. However, use Motorola-S format format when loading the hex files to the
debugger or creating the mask data by the mask data checker because the debugger and mask data
checker do not support Intel-HEX files.
6.5.2 Motorola-S Format
The hex converter converts an absolute object file in the IEEE-695 format into the Motorola-S2 format files
by default.
The files are generated with an extension ".hsa" for the high-order program file, ".lsa" for the low-order
program file and ".csa" for the data ROM file.
The following shows a sample data in Motorola-S2 format:
length
address
data
sum
S224000000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFB
S224000020FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFDB
:
S22400010008E000F04200420606FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF89
:
S804000000FB
S2 (1 bytes):
S8 (1 bytes):
length (1 byte):
Indicates that the line is a data record.
Indicates that the line is an end record (end of data).
Indicates the record length of "address + data + sum". The maximum length of a
data record is 0x24, while the end record is fixed at 0x04.
Indicates the address where the head data in a record is placed.
address (3 bytes):
data (32 bytes max.): The object codes are placed here. This is not included in the end record.
sum (1 byte): This is a checksum (1's complement) from "length" to the last data.
The end records are always "S804000000FB".
108
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 6: HEX CONVERTER
6.5.3 Intel-HEX Format
The hex converter converts an absolute object file in the IEEE-695 format into the Intel-HEX format files
when the -i option is specified.
The files are generated with a name "<file name>h.hex" for the high-order program file, "<file name>l.hex" for
the low-order program file and "<file name>c.hex" for the data ROM file.
The following shows a sample data in Intel-HEX format:
data volume type
address
data
sum
:10000000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF00
:10001000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0
:
:1001000008E000F04200420606FFFFFFFFFFFFFF8E
:
:100FF000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF01
:
:00000001FF
data volume (1 byte): Indicates the data length of each record. The maximum length of a data record is
0x10, while the end record is fixed at 0x00.
address (2 bytes):
type (1 byte):
Indicates the address where the head data in a record is placed.
Indicates the type of hexadecimal format, currently only "00".
data (16 bytes max.): The object codes are placed here. This is not included in the end record.
sum (1 byte): This is a checksum (2's complement) from "Data volume" to the last data.
The end records are always "00000001FF".
Note: When using hex files for creating the mask data, do not specify Intel-HEX format because the
mask data checker does not support this format.
6.5.4 Conversion Range
By default, the hex converter generates the hex files that include all the codes of the ROM area available
for each model. Data for unused addresses are delivered as 0xff. For example, if the model has a built-in
2KB code ROM and the program uses the area from address 0x0 to address 0x6ff, the hex converter fills
the area from address 0x700 to address 0x7ff with 0xff. If there are unused addresses in the range from
0x0 to 0x6ff, those data are also delivered as 0xff.
When creating the mask data by the mask data checker, the hex files must be generated in this format.
When the -b option is specified, the hex converter does not deliver data in unused addresses of the
absolute object file. This allows minimization of the output hex files. Note, however that the hex files
generated in this format cannot be used for creating the mask data.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
109
CHAPTER 6: HEX CONVERTER
6.6 Error/Warning Messages
6.6.1 Errors
When an error occurs, the hex converter immediately terminates the processing after displaying an error
message. It will not output hex files.
The hex converter error messages are given below.
Error message
Cannot create <file kind> file <FILE NAME>
Cannot open <file kind> file <FILE NAME>
Cannot read <file kind> file <FILE NAME>
Cannot write <file kind> file <FILE NAME>
Illegal file name <FILE NAME> specified with
option <option>
Description
The file cannot be created.
The file cannot be opened.
The file cannot be read.
Data cannot be written to the file.
The specified hex file name is incorrect.
Illegal ICE parameter at line <line number> of
<FILE NAME>
The ICE parameter file contains an illegal parameter setting.
Illegal file name <FILE NAME>
Illegal option <option>
The specified input file name is incorrect.
An illegal option is specified.
Illegal absolute object format
The input file is not an object file in IEEE-695 format.
ICE parameter file is not specified.
Cannot secure memory space.
No ICE parameter file specified
Out of memory
6.6.2 Warning
Even if a warning is issued, the hex converter keeps on processing, and completes the processing after
displaying a warning message, unless, in addition, any error occurs.
Warning message
Description
Input file name extension .XXX conflict
Two or more file names with the same extension have been
specified. The last one is used.
6.7 Precautions
(1) When creating the hex files for making the mask data file in the mask data checker, specify Motorola-S
format and convert for the entire available memory range of the model (do not specify the -b and -i
options). Otherwise, an error will occur in the mask data checker. Refer to the "Development Tool
Manual" of each model for details of the mask data checker.
(2) If an 8-character output file name (DOS file name) without extension is specified for the Intel-HEX
files, it will be changed to a long file name because "h.hex", "l.hex" or "c.hex" is added to the file name.
110
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 7: DISASSEMBLER
CHAPTER 7 DISASSEMBLER
This chapter describes the functions of the disassembler, ds63.
7.1 Functions
The disassembler's input is an object in IEEE-695 or Motorola-S format. The code in the object file is
disassembled into mnemonics, and output as a source file. The restored source file can be processed in
the assembler/linker/hex converter to obtain the same object or hex file.
7.2 Input/Output Files
from Linker
file.abs
from Hex converter
file.hsa
IEEE-695 absolute
object file
Motorola-S file
file.lsa
file.csa
or
Disassembler
ds63
file.ms
ds63.err
Error file
Preprocessed source file
Fig. 7.2.1 Flow chart
7.2.1 Input Files
Absolute object file
File format: Binary file in IEEE-695 format
File name: <File name>.abs
(A path can also be specified)
Description: Absolute object file created by the linker
Hex file
File format: Text file in Motorola-S format
File name: <File name>.hsa, <File name>.lsa and <File name>.csa
Description: Hex files created by the hex converter. Three hex files are needed: ".hsa" that con-
tains the four high-order bits of the object codes with 0b000 extended, ".lsa" that
contains the eight low-order bits and ".csa" that contains four-bit data for the data
ROM. If there is no data ROM, the ".csa" file is not required.
7.2.2 Output Files
Source file
File format: Text file
File name: <File name>.ms
Output destination: Current directory
Description: Disassembled contents of the input file are delivered.
Error file
File format: Text file
File name: ds63.err
Output destination: Current directory
Description: The file is created if the -e start-up option is specified. It records the information that
the disassembler outputs to the Standard Output (stdout), such as error messages.
The file name is "ds63.err" by default, but it can be changed using the -o start-up
option.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
111
CHAPTER 7: DISASSEMBLER
7.3 Starting Method
General form of command line
ds63 [Options] <Absolute object or hex file name>
^
^
denotes a space.
[ ] indicates the possibility to omit.
^
File names
Absolute object file: <File name>.abs
Motorola-S files:
<File name>.hsa, <File name>.lsa, <File name>.csa
The input file must be specified with its extension.
The Motorola-S file can be specified with either ".hsa", ".lsa" or ".csa" as the extension. The other
unspecified files will be automatically loaded.
A long file name supported in Windows and a path name can be specified. When including spaces in
the file name, enclose the file name with double quotation marks (").
Options
The disassembler comes provided with the following four start-up options:
-cl
Function: Use of lower-case characters
Explanation: Creates all instructions and labels using lower-case characters.
Default: If neither this option nor the -cu option is specified, the source will be made with
all labels in upper-case characters and instructions in lower-case characters.
-cu
Function: Use of upper-case characters
Explanation: Creates all instructions and labels using upper-case characters.
Default: If neither this option nor the -cl option is specified, the source will be made with
all labels in upper-case characters and instructions in lower-case characters.
-e
Function: Output of error file
Explanation: Creates an .err file which contains the information that the disassembler outputs
to the Standard Output (stdout), such as error messages.
Default: If this option is not specified, an error file will not be created.
-o <file name>
Function: Specification of output path/file name
Explanation: Specify an output path/file name without extension or with the extension ".ms".
If no extension is specified, ".ms" will be supplemented at the end of the specified
output path/file name.
Default: The input file name is used for the output file name.
When entering an option in the command line, one or more spaces are necessary before and after the
option.
Example: c:\epson\s1c63\bin\ds63 -e -o c:\output.ms
112
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 7: DISASSEMBLER
7.4 Messages
The disassembler delivers all its messages via the Standard Output (stdout).
Start-up message
The disassembler outputs the following message when it starts up.
Disassembler 63 Ver x.xx
Copyright (C) SEIKO EPSON CORP. 1998-2001
End message
The disassembler outputs the following messages to indicate which files have been created when it
ends normally.
Created preprocessed source file <FILE NAME>.MS
Created error log file DS63.ERR
Disassembly 0 error(s) 0 warning(s)
Usage output
If no file name was specified or an option was not specified correctly, the disassembler ends after
delivering the following message concerning the usage:
Usage: ds63 [options] <file name>
Options: -cl
Use lower case characters
Use upper case characters
Output error log file (DS63.ERR)
-cu
-e
-o <file name> Specify output file name
File names: Absolute object file (.ABS or .CSA/.LSA/.HSA)
When error/warning occurs
If an error occurs, an error message will appear before the end message shows up.
Example:
Error: Cannot open file TEST.ABS
Disassembly 1 error(s) 0 warning(s)
In the case of an error, the disassembler ends without creating an output file.
If a warning is issued, a warning message will appear before the end message shows up.
Example:
Warning: Input file name extension .HSA conflict
Disassembly 0 error(s) 1 warning(s)
In the case of a warning, the disassembler ends after creating an output file.
For details on errors and warnings, refer to Section 7.6 "Error/Warning Messages".
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
113
CHAPTER 7: DISASSEMBLER
7.5 Disassembling Output
The data/code mnemonics are restored from the target code. As for the branch instructions, a label will
be automatically generated such as "CODEx:" where "x" denotes a hexadecimal number string. Other
reference symbols will also be generated as "LABELx", "IOx" and "RAMx". The ".org" pseudo-instruction
is used to specify the starting location of each code block.
The following shows examples of disassembled sources:
Sample outputs
Absolute list file "test.als"
Linker 63 ver x.xx Absolute list file "TEST.ALS" Mom Jan 15 12:40:41 2001
1:
2:
; sub.s
; AS63 test program (subroutine)
3:
4:
.global RAM_BLK1
5:
6:
;***** RAM block 1 initialize *****
7:
8:
9:
.global INIT_RAM_BLK1
INIT_RAM_BLK1:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
39:
40:
41:
42:
43:
44:
45:
46:
47:
48:
49:
50:
51:
52:
53:
54:
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0800
0a04
1e90
1e90
1e90
1e80
1ff8
ldb
ldb
ld
ld
ld
%ext,RAM_BLK1@h
%xl,RAM_BLK1@l
[%x]+,0x0
[%x]+,0x0
[%x]+,0x0
;set RAM_BLK1 address to x
;set 0x0000 to RAM_BLK1
ld
ret
[%x],0x0
;***** RAM block 1 increment *****
.global INC_RAM_BLK1
INC_RAM_BLK1:
0007
0008
0009
000a
000b
000c
000d
0800
0a04
1911
1990
1990
1980
1ff8
ldb
ldb
add
adc
adc
adc
ret
%ext,RAM_BLK1@h
%xl,RAM_BLK1@l
[%x]+,1
[%x]+,0
[%x]+,0
;set RAM_BLK1 address to x
; increment 16bit value
[%x],0
; main.s
; AS63 test program (main routine)
;
;***** INITIAL SP1 & SP2 ADDRESS DEFINITION *****
#ifdef SMALL_RAM
.set SP1_INIT_ADDR 0xb
;SP1 init addr = 0x2c
#else
.set SP1_INIT_ADDR 0x4b
;SP1 init addr = 0x12c
;SP2 init addr = 0x1f
#endif
.set SP2_INIT_ADDR 0x1f
;***** NMI & BOOT, LOOP *****
.global INIT_RAM_BLK1
.global INC_RAM_BLK1
; subroutine in sub.s
; subroutine in sub.s
.org
0x100
NMI:
0100
0101
0102
08fe
02fe
1ff9
(+)
ldb ext,fe
calr
reti
INIT_RAM_BLK1
; initialize RAM block 1
; in NMI(watchdog timer)
114
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 7: DISASSEMBLER
55:
56:
57:
58:
59:
60:
61:
62:
63:
64:
65:
66:
.org
0x110
BOOT:
LOOP:
0110
0111
0112
0113
0114
0115
094b
1fc4
091f
1fc6
08fe
02ea
ldb
ldb
ldb
ldb
ldb ext,fe
calr
%ba,SP1_INIT_ADDR
%sp1,%ba
%ba,SP2_INIT_ADDR
%sp2,%ba
; set SP1
; set SP2
(+)
(+)
INIT_RAM_BLK1
; initialize RAM block 1
0116
0117
0118
08fe
02ef
00fd
ldb ext,fe
calr
jr
INC_RAM_BLK1
LOOP
; increment RAM block 1
; infinity loop
Output source file "test.ms" (default)
;Disassembler 63 Ver x.xx Assembly source file TEST.MS Mon Jan 15 13:10:20 2001
.set LABEL1 0x4
.set LABEL2 0x4
.set LABEL3 0x4b
.set LABEL4 0x1f
.code
.org
0x0
CODE1:
CODE2:
ldb %ext,LABEL1@h
ldb %xl,LABEL1@l
ld [%x]+,0x0
ld [%x]+,0x0
ld [%x]+,0x0
ld [%x],0x0
ret
ldb %ext,LABEL2@h
ldb %xl,LABEL2@l
add [%x]+,0x1
adc [%x]+,0x0
adc [%x]+,0x0
adc [%x],0x0
ret
.code
.org
0x100
ldb %ext,CODE1@rh
calr CODE1@rl
reti
.code
.org
0x110
ldb %ba,LABEL3@l
ldb %sp1,%ba
ldb %ba,LABEL4@l
ldb %sp2,%ba
ldb %ext,CODE1@rh
calr CODE1@rl
CODE3:
ldb %ext,CODE2@rh
calr CODE2@rl
jr CODE3@rl
Output source file "test.ms" (when -cl is specified)
;Disassembler 63 Ver x.xx Assembly source file TEST.MS Mon Jan 15 13:10:20 2001
.set label1 0x4
.set label2 0x4
.set label3 0x4b
.set label4 0x1f
.code
.org
0x0
code1:
code2:
ldb %ext,label1@h
ldb %xl,label1@l
ld [%x]+,0x0
ld [%x]+,0x0
ld [%x]+,0x0
ld [%x],0x0
ret
ldb %ext,label2@h
ldb %xl,label2@l
add [%x]+,0x1
adc [%x]+,0x0
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
115
CHAPTER 7: DISASSEMBLER
adc [%x]+,0x0
adc [%x],0x0
ret
.code
.org
0x100
ldb %ext,code1@rh
calr code1@rl
reti
.code
.org
0x110
ldb %ba,label3@l
ldb %sp1,%ba
ldb %ba,label4@l
ldb %sp2,%ba
ldb %ext,code1@rh
calr code1@rl
code3:
ldb %ext,code2@rh
calr code2@rl
jr code3@rl
Output source file "test.ms" (when -cu is specified)
;Disassembler 63 Ver x.xx Assembly source file TEST.MS Mon Jan 15 13:10:20 2001
.SET LABEL1 0X4
.SET LABEL2 0X4
.SET LABEL3 0X4B
.SET LABEL4 0X1F
.CODE
.ORG
0X0
CODE1:
CODE2:
LDB %EXT,LABEL1@H
LDB %XL,LABEL1@L
LD [%X]+,0X0
LD [%X]+,0X0
LD [%X]+,0X0
LD [%X],0X0
RET
LDB %EXT,LABEL2@H
LDB %XL,LABEL2@L
ADD [%X]+,0X1
ADC [%X]+,0X0
ADC [%X]+,0X0
ADC [%X],0X0
RET
.CODE
.ORG
0X100
LDB %EXT,CODE1@RH
CALR CODE1@RL
RETI
.CODE
.ORG
0X110
LDB %BA,LABEL3@L
LDB %SP1,%BA
LDB %BA,LABEL4@L
LDB %SP2,%BA
LDB %EXT,CODE1@RH
CALR CODE1@RL
CODE3:
LDB %EXT,CODE2@RH
CALR CODE2@RL
JR CODE3@RL
116
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 7: DISASSEMBLER
7.6 Error/Warning Messages
7.6.1 Errors
When an error occurs, the disassembler immediately terminates the processing after displaying an error
message. It will not output a source file.
The disassembler error messages are given below.
Error message
Cannot create <file kind> file <FILE NAME>
Cannot open <file kind> file <FILE NAME>
Cannot read <file kind> file <FILE NAME>
Cannot write <file kind> file <FILE NAME>
Illegal file name <FILE NAME> specified with
option <option>
Description
The file cannot be created.
The file cannot be opened.
The file cannot be read.
Data cannot be written to the file.
The specified output source file name is incorrect.
Illegal file name <FILE NAME>
Illegal HEX data format
The specified input file name is incorrect.
The input file is not a Motorola-S format file.
An illegal option is specified.
Illegal option <option>
Out of memory
Cannot secure memory space.
7.6.2 Warning
Even if a warning is issued, the disassembler keeps on processing, and completes the processing after
displaying a warning message, unless, in addition, an error is produced.
Warning message
Description
Two or more file names with the same extension have been
specified. The last one is used.
Input file name extension .XXX conflict
Cannot open Hex file xxx.csa
The file cannot be opened. It is assumed there is no data
memory.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
117
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
CHAPTER 8 DEBUGGER
This chapter describes how to use the Debugger db63.
8.1 Features
The Debugger db63 is used to debug a program after reading an object file in the IEEE-695 format that is
generated by the linker.
It has the following features and functions:
• Various data can be referenced at the same time using multiple windows.
• Frequently used commands can be executed from tool bars and menus using a mouse.
• Also available are source display and symbolic debug functions which correspond to assembly source
codes.
• Consecutive program execution and two types of single-stepping are possible.
• Five break functions are supported.
• A real-time display function shows register and memory contents on-the-fly.
• A time display function showing execution time by both duration and steps.
• An advanced trace function.
• An automatic command execution function using a command file.
8.2 Input/Output Files
from Linker
IEEE-695
Parameter file object file
Source file(s)
file.s
Command file
file.cmd
file.par
file.abs
file.hsa
file.lsa
file.csa
file.fsa
file.ssa
file.msa
Debugger
db63
ICE
Program/data
HEX files
Option
HEX files
file.cmd
file.log
file.trc
Trace file
Fig. 8.2.1 Flow chart
Record file
Log file
8.2.1 Input Files
Parameter file
File format: Binary file
File name: <file name>.par
Description: This file contains memory information on each microcomputer model and is indispensable
for starting the debugger. This file is provided for each microcomputer model.
The following files are read by the debugger according to command specification.
Object file
File format: Binary file in the IEEE-695 format
File name: <file name>.abs (An extension other than ".abs" can also be used.)
Description: This is an object file generated by the linker. This file is read into the debugger by the lf
command. By reading a file in the IEEE-695 format that contains debug information, source
display and symbolic debugging can be performed.
118
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
Source file
File format: Text file
File name: <file name>.s
Description: This is the source file of the above object file. It is read when the debugger performs source
display.
Program file
File format: HEX file in Motorola-S format
File name: <file name>.hsa, <file name>.lsa
Description: This is a load image file of the program ROM, and is read into the debugger by the lo
command. The file ".hsa" corresponds to the 5 high-order bits of the program code and the
file ".lsa" corresponds to the 8 low-order bits of the program code. These files are generated
for the purpose of creating mask data from an object file in the IEEE-695 format by the Hex
convertor. Unlike files in the IEEE-695 format, these files cannot be used for source display
or symbolic debugging, but can be used to check the operation of final program data.
Data file for data ROM
File format: HEX file in Motorola-S format
File name: <file name>.csa
Description: This is a load image file of the data ROM, and is read into the debugger by the lo com-
mand. This file is generated for the purpose of creating mask data from an object file in the
IEEE-695 format by the Hex convertor. When an absolute object file in the IEEE-695 format
is loaded, it is not necessary to load this file.
Option data file
File format: HEX file in Motorola-S format
File name: <file name>.fsa, <file name>.ssa, <file name>.msa (Varies with the type of microcomputer)
Description: These data files are used to set up hardware options for each microcomputer model and is
read by the lo command. These files are generated by a development tool available for each
microcomputer model.
Command file
File format: Text file
File name: <file name>.cmd (An extension other than ".cmd" can also be used.)
Description: This file contains a description of debug commands to be executed successively. By writing
a series of frequently used commands in this file, the time and labor required for entering
commands from the keyboard can be saved. The command described in the file are read
and executed using the com or cmw command.
8.2.2 Output Files
Log file
File format: Text file
File name: <file name>.log (An extension other than ".log" can also be used.)
Description: This file contains the information of executed commands and execution results that are
output to a file. Output of this file can be controlled by the log command.
Record file
File format: Text file
File name: <file name>.cmd (An extension other than ".cmd" can also be used.)
Description: This file contains the information of executed commands that are output to a file. Output of
this file can be controlled by the rec command.
Trace file
File format: Text file
File name: <file name>.trc (An extension other than ".trc" can also be used.)
Description: This file contains the specified range of trace information. Output of this file can be con-
trolled by the tf command.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
119
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.3 Starting Method
8.3.1 Start-up Format
General form of command line
db63 <parameter file name> [start-up option]
^
^
denotes a space.
[ ] indicates the possibility to omit.
^
Note: The parameter file will be recognized by its extension ".par", so ".par" must be included in the
parameter file name to be specified.
8.3.2 Start-up Options
The debugger has three start up options available.
<command file name>
Function: Specifies a command file.
Explanation: For a series of commands to be executed immediately after the debugger starts
up, specify a command file that describes those commands.
-comX
Function: Specifies a communication port.
Explanation: This option specifies the communication port through which a personal com-
puter is communicated with by the ICE. Specify a port number in the X part of
this option. The port that can be used for this purpose varies among different
personal computers.
Unless this option is specified, the com1 port is used to communicate with the
ICE.
-b <baud rate>
Function: Specifies a communication transmission rate.
Explanation: This option specifies the baud rate on the personal computer. For <baud rate>,
select one from 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or 38400.
Unless specified otherwise, the baud rate is set to 9600 bps. This value is the
same as the initial setting of the ICE.
The baud rate on the ICE is set using the DIP switch mounted on the ICE.
When entering an option in a command line, make sure that there is at least one space before and after
the option.
Example: c:\epson\s1c63\bin\db63 par63xxx.par startup.cmd -com2 -b 19200
The default start-up options are set as: -com1 & -b 9600
If no parameter file name was specified or the option was not specified correctly, the debugger ends after
delivering the following message concerning the usage:
-Usage-
db63.exe parameter file name <startup options>
Options:
command file: ... specifies a command file
-comX(X:1-4) ... com port, default com1
-b
... baud rate, 2400, 4800, 9600(default), 19200, 38400
120
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.3.3 Start-up Messages
When the debugger starts up, it outputs the following message in the [Command] window. (Refer to the
next section for details about windows.)
Debugger63 Ver x.xx Copyright SEIKO EPSON CORP. 1998-2001
Connecting COMx with xxxxx baud rate ... done
Parameter file name
: xxxxxxxx.par
Version : xx
Chip name : 63xxx
: x.x
CPU version
PRC board version
LCD board version
EXT board version
ICE hardware version
ICE software version
DIAG test
: x.x
: x.x
: x.x
: x.x
: x.x
: omitted
Map............................... done
Initialize........................ done
>
8.3.4 Hardware Check at Start-up
When the debugger is invoked, it first performs the tests and initializing operations described below.
(1) Testing connection of the ICE
Debugger db63 first checks to see that the ICE is connected to your system and that communication is
possible without any problems. The following message is displayed in the [Command] window.
During test
Connecting COMx with xxxxx baud rate ...
When terminated normally
Connecting COMx with xxxxx baud rate ... done
When an error is encountered
Connecting COMx with xxxxx baud rate ... failure
<error message>
The error message indicates that communication between the personal computer and the ICE is not
functioning properly. In this case, to verify the following:
• A standard RS-232C cable is used
• The COM port is correct
• The baud rates on both sides are matched
• The PRC board is correctly fitted in place
• The ICE's power is turned on
• The ICE remains reset
For the causes of errors, refer to Section 8.10, "Status/Error/Warning Messages".
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
121
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
If this test indicates that the ICE is not in ready state, the debugger performs the following:
When the ICE is executing the target program:
In this case, the debugger sends a forcible break command to the ICE; it then retests the connection of
the ICE several seconds later.
When the ICE is in the BUSY state:
In this case, the debugger will try to retest the connection with the ICE several seconds later.
When the ICE is in a free-run state:
In this case, the debugger displays the following message:
Connecting COMx with xxxxx baud rate ... failure
Error : ICE is free run mode
Temporarily quit the debugger and set the ICE to the ICE mode (by turning the ICE/RUN switch to
the ICE position), then restart up the debugger.
When the ICE is performing self-diagnosis:
In this case, the debugger waits until the ICE's self-diagnosis is completed before it starts testing the
connection of the ICE. Note that the ICE's self-diagnosis is executed simultaneously if it is activated
when its DIP switch SW8 is in the up position. If the SW8 switch is in the down position, self-diagno-
sis is not executed. Self-diagnosis from start to finish requires about 5 minutes. Wait until it is com-
pleted.
You will then see the following message:
Connecting COMx with xxxxx baud rate ...
DIAG test, please wait 5 min. .. done
If an error is found in self-diagnosis, an error message will be displayed on the screen instead of
"done" above.
(2) Version check
When the connection test terminates normally, the debugger checks the contents of the parameter file,
the version of the ICE, and the versions of the peripheral boards inserted in the ICE.
Parameter file name
: xxxxxxxx.par
Version : xx
Chip name : 63xxx
: x.x
CPU version
PRC board version
LCD board version
EXT board version
ICE hardware version
ICE software version
DIAG test
: x.x
: x.x
: x.x
: x.x
: x.x
: omitted
Here, the debugger checks to see if the ICE's system configuration (including extension boards such as
a PRC board (Peripheral Circuit Board) and an LCD board) and their versions are matched to the
setup contents of the parameter file.
If the ICE does not have a necessary board, or contains an unnecessary board or a board of different
version, a warning message appears on the screen.
122
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
(3) ICE initialization
When the above tests are finished, the debugger initializes the ICE as follows:
• Mapping (memory configuration is set according to the parameter file)
• Initializing mapped memory (RAM: 0xa; code ROM: 0x1fff; data ROM: 0xf)
• Initializing option data (cleared to 0)
• Initializing break conditions (all break conditions are cleared)
• Initializing trace conditions (normal trace is set and the trace trigger point is set to 0)
• Setting execution cycles counter to 0.
• Initial setting of watch data addresses (addresses 0, 4, 8, and C)
• Initializing CPU registers
When initialization is terminated normally:
Map............................... done
Initialize........................ done
>
When an error is encountered:
Map............................... done
Initialize........................ Error
Please quit db63 and restart!
>
If an error occurs in the above initialization process, temporarily quit the debugger. Check the cause
of the error and repair it before restarting the debugger.
After initialization, the state of the screen including the position and size of the windows will return the
same as the last time the debugger was terminated. The contents displayed in each window if it is opened
are as follows:
Window
Display contents
[Command] window
[Data] window
[Register] window
[Source] window
Initialization information (and waits for command input)
Data memory contents starting from data memory address 0
Current register values
Program memory contents starting from program memory address 0x0100
The previously set display mode (Unassemble, Source or Mix) is used.
Blank
[Trace] window
8.3.5 Method of Termination
To terminate the debugger, select [Exit] from the [File] menu.
You can also input the q command in the [Command] window to terminate the debugger.
>q
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
123
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.4 Windows
This section describes the types of windows used by the debugger.
8.4.1 Basic Structure of Window
The diagram below shows the window structure of the debugger.
[Source] window
[Trace] window
[Register] window
[Command] window
[Data] window
Depending on the computer used, the windows may differ from the above display depending on the
screen resolution, the number of dots in system font, etc. Adjust the size of each window to suit needs.
124
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
Features common to all windows
(1) Open/close and activating a window
All windows except [Command] can be closed or opened.
To open a window, select the window name from the [View] menu. To close a window, click the
[Close] box on the window. After initialization, the state of the screen including the position and size
of the windows will return to the same as the last time the debugger was terminated.
The opened windows are listed in the [Window] menu. Selecting one from the list activates the
selected window. It can also be done by simply clicking on an inactive window. Furthermore, pressing
[Ctrl]+[Tab] switches the active window to the next open window.
(2) Resizing and moving a window
Each window can be resized as needed by dragging the boundary of the window with the mouse. The
[Minimize] and [Maximize] buttons work in the same way as in general Windows applications. Each
window can be moved to the desired display position by dragging the window's title bar with the
mouse. However, windows can only be resized and moved within the range of the application
window.
(3) Scrolling a window
All windows can be scrolled. (The [Register] window can be scrolled only when its size is reduced.)
Use one of the following three methods to scroll a window:
1. Click on an arrow button or enter an arrow key (cursor movement) to scroll a window one line at a
time.
2. Click on the scroll bar of a window to scroll it one page (current window size) at a time.
3. Drag the scroll bar handle of a window to move it to the desired area.
(4) Other
The opened windows can be cascaded or tiled using the [Window] menu.
Note for display
The windows may display incorrect contents caused by incompatibility between the OS and the video
card or driver. If there is any problem try the following methods to fix it.
•
Update the driver to the latest version if an older version has been installed.
Please inquire about the version to the distributor.
•
•
If the driver allows selection of extended function such as acceleration, turn the functions off.
If the problem is not fixed using the above, try the standard driver supplied with Windows95/98/NT.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
125
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.4.2 [Command] Window
The [Command] window is used to do the following:
(1) Entering debug commands
When the prompt ">" appears in the [Command] window, the system will accept a command entered
from the keyboard.
If some other window is selected, click on the [Command] window. A cursor will blink at the prompt,
indicating that readiness to input a command. (Refer to Section 8.7.1, "Entering Commands from
Keyboard".)
(2) Displaying debug commands selected from menus or tool bar
When a command is executed by selecting the menu item or tool bar button, the executed command
line is displayed in the [Command] window.
(3) Displaying command execution results
The [Command] window displays command execution results. However, some command execution
results are displayed in the [Source], [Data], [Register], or [Trace] windows. The contents of these
execution results are displayed when their corresponding windows are open. If the corresponding
window is closed, the execution result is displayed in the [Command] window.
When writing to a log file, the content of the write data is displayed in the window. (Refer to the
description for log command.)
Note: The [Command] window cannot be closed.
126
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.4.3 [Source] Window
The [Source] window displays the contents of (1) to (4) listed below. This window also allows breakpoints
to be set and words or labels to be found.
(1) Unassembled codes and source codes
You can choose one of the following three display modes:
1. Mix mode
(selected by the [Mix] button or entering the m command)
In this mode, the window displays the addresses, codes, unassembled contents,
and corresponding source line numbers and source statements. (See the dia-
[Mix] button
gram above.)
2. Source mode
(selected by the [Source] button or entering the sc command)
In this mode, the window displays the source line numbers and source state-
ments.
[Source] button
3. Unassemble mode
(selected by the [Unassemble] button or entering the u command)
In this mode, the window displays the addresses, codes, and unassembled
contents. This format is selected when the debugger starts up.
[Unassemble] button
Note: The m, sc and u commands can update the [Source] window if the window is already opened. If
the [Source] window is closed, the program code is displayed in the [Command] window.
The [Mix], [Source] and [Unassemble] buttons open the [Source] window if the window is closed.
All program code in the 64K address space can be referenced by scrolling the window. When a break
occurs, the display content is updated so that the address line to be executed next is displayed, with
an arrow mark at the beginning of the line for identification.
Use the scroll bar or arrow keys to scroll the window. Or enter a command to display the program
code beginning with a specified position.
∗ Display of source line numbers and source statements
The source line numbers and source statements can only be displayed when the IEEE-695 absolute
object file including debugging information for the source display is loaded. Furthermore, the source
statements that are actually displayed from this file are those which have had the -g option specified
by the assembler.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
127
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
∗ Updating of display
When a program is loaded and executed (g, gr, s, n, or rst command), or the memory contents are
changed (a (as), pe, pf, or pm command), the display contents are updated. In this case the [Source]
window updates its display contents so that the current PC address can always be displayed. The
display contents are also updated when the display mode is changed.
(2) Current PC
The current PC (program counter) address line is indicated by an arrow mark at the beginning of the
line. (Address 0x0110 in the diagram)
(3) PC breakpoint
The address line where a breakpoint is set is indicated by a red ● mark at the beginning of the line.
(Address 0x0117 in the diagram)
(4) Trace trigger point
The address line where a trace trigger point is set is indicated by the letter "T" at the beginning of the
line. (Address 0x0115 in the diagram)
(5) Break setting at the cursor position
Place the cursor at an address line where a breakpoint is to be set (not available for a source-only line).
Then click on the [Break] button. A PC breakpoint will be set at that address. If
the same is done at the address line where a PC breakpoint has been set, the
breakpoint will be cleared.
[Break] button
If the [Go to Cursor] button is clicked, the program will execute beginning
with the current PC position, and program execution breaks at the line where
the cursor is located.
[Go to Cursor] button
(6) Finding labels and words
Any labels and words can be found using the [Search Label] pull-down list box or the [Find] button
on the [Source] window.
[Search Label] pull-down list box
[Find] button
128
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.4.4 [Data] Window
(1) Displaying data memory contents
The [Data] window displays the memory dump
results in hexadecimal numbers.
The display area is the entire 64K-word data memory
space (RAM, data ROM, I/O). The contents of all
addresses from 0x0000 to 0xffff can be displayed by
scrolling the window. The contents of unmapped
addresses in each microcomputer model are indicated
by an "∗".
* Updating of display
The display contents of the [Data] window are updated automatically when memory contents are
modified with a command (de, df, or dm command), or by direct modification. After executing the
program (g, gr, s, n, or rst command), the display contents are also updated. To refresh the [Data]
window manually, execute the dd command or click the vertical scroll bar.
(2) Direct modification of data memory contents
The [Data] window allows direct modification of data memory contents. To modify data on the [Data]
window, place the cursor at the front of the data to be modified or double click the data, and then type
a hexadecimal character (0–9, a–f). Data in the address will be modified with the entered number and
the cursor will move to the next address. This allows successive modification of a series of addresses.
8.4.5 [Register] Window
(1) Displaying register contents
The [Register] window displays the contents of the PC, A register, B register,
X register and its memory, Y register and its memory and flags (E, I, C, Z),
stack pointers (SP1, SP2), EXT register, and QUEUE register.
(2) Execution cycle counter
This counter calculates and indicates the number of executed cycles or
execution time since the CPU was reset.
(3) Monitor data
The debugger allows you to specify four addresses in RAM and monitor the
memory contents at these addresses. The [Register] window displays the
contents of these four watch data addresses (4 words each beginning from
the specified address). When the debugger starts up, addresses 0, 4, 8, and
C are initially set as the watch data addresses. The contents are arranged
sequentially from left to right in order of their addresses as they are dis-
played on the screen.
∗ Updating the display
The display is updated when registers are dumped (rd command), when watch data addresses are set
(dw command), when register data is modified (rs command), when the CPU is reset (rst command),
or after program execution (g, gr, s, or n command) is completed.
When the on-the-fly function is enabled, the PC, flag and watch data are updated in real time at 0.5
second intervals while the program is being executed. Other contents are left blank until the program
is stopped by a break.
(4) Direct modification of register contents
The [Register] window allows direct modification of register contents. To modify data on the [Regis-
ter] window, select (highlight) the data to be modified and type a hexadecimal number (0–9, a–f), then
press [Enter]. The register data will be modified with the entered number.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
129
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.4.6 [Trace] Window
The [Trace] window displays the trace result up to 8,192 cycles by reading it from the ICE trace memory.
The following lists the trace contents:
• Traced cycle number
• Fetched address
• Fetched code and disassembled contents
• Register contents (A, B, X, Y, and flags)
• Memory access status (address, R/W, data, and SP1/SP2)
• TRCIN pin input status
This window also displays the trace data search results by the ts command.
∗ Updating of display:
The contents of the [Trace] window are cleared when the target program is being executed. During
this period, the [Trace] window does not accept scrolling and resizing operations.
After an program execution is terminated, this window displays the latest data traced during the
execution. To specify a display start cycle, execute the td command.
130
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.5 Tool Bar
This section outlines the tool bar available with the debugger.
8.5.1 Tool Bar Structure
The tool bar has 14 buttons, each one assigned to a frequently used command.
The specified function is executed when you click on the corresponding button.
8.5.2 [Key Break] Button
This button forcibly breaks execution of the target program. This function can be used to cause the
program to break when the program has fallen into an endless loop.
8.5.3 [Load File] and [Load Option] Buttons
[Load File] button
This button reads an object file in the IEEE-695 format into the debugger. It performs the same
function when the lf command is executed.
[Load Option] button
This button reads a program file, data file for the data ROM or an optional HEX file in Motorola-S
format into the debugger. It performs the same function when the lo command is executed.
8.5.4 [Source], [Mix], and [Unassemble] Buttons
These buttons open the [Source] window or switch over the display modes.
[Source] button
This button switches the display of the [Source] window to the source mode. The [Source] window
opens if it is closed. This button performs the same function when the sc command is executed.
[Unassemble] button
This button switches the display of the [Source] window to the unassemble mode. The [Source]
window opens if it is closed. This button performs the same function when the u command is
executed.
[Mix] button
This button switches the display of the [Source] window to the mix mode (unassemble & source).
The [Source] window opens if it is closed. This button performs the same function when the m
command is executed.
8.5.5 [Go], [Go to Cursor], [Go from Reset], [Step], [Next], and [Reset] Buttons
[Go] button
This button executes the target program from the address indicated by the current PC. It performs the
same function when the g command is executed.
[Go to Cursor] button
This button executes the target program from the address indicated by the current PC to the cursor
position in the [Source] window (the address of that line). It performs the same function when the
g <address> command is executed.
Before this button can be selected, the [Source] window must be open and the address line where
the program is to break must be clicked. Selecting a break address by clicking on the address line
is valid for only the lines that have actual code, and is invalid for the source-only lines.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
131
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
[Go from Reset] button
This button resets the CPU and then executes the target program from the program start address
(0x110). It performs the same function when the gr command is executed.
[Step] button
This button executes one instruction step at the address indicated by the current PC. It performs
the same function when the s command is executed.
[Next] button
This button executes one instruction step at the address indicated by the current PC. If the instruc-
tion to be executed is calr, calz or int, it is assumed that a program section until control returns to
the next address constitutes one step and all steps of their subroutines are executed. This button
performs the same function when the n command is executed.
[Reset] button
This button resets the CPU. It performs the same function when the rst command is executed.
8.5.6 [Break] Button
Use this button to set and clear a breakpoint at the address where the cursor is located in the
[Source] window. This function is valid only when the [Source] window is open. Note that select-
ing a break address by clicking on the address line is valid for only the lines that have actual code
and is invalid for the source-only lines.
8.5.7 [Help] Button
By clicking on this button, a help window appears on the screen, displaying the contents of help topics.
132
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.6 Menu
This section outlines the menu bar available with the debugger.
8.6.1 Menu Structure
The menu bar has eight menus, each including frequently-used commands.
8.6.2 [File] Menu
[Load File...]
This menu item reads an object file in the IEEE-695 format into the debugger.
It performs the same function when the lf command is executed.
[Load Option...]
This menu item reads a program file, data file for the data ROM or an optional
HEX file in Motorola-S format into the debugger. It performs the same
function when the lo command is executed.
[Flash Memory Operation...]
This menu item reads/writes data from/to the Flash memory or erases the
Flash memory contents. It performs the same function when the lfl, sfl or efl
command is executed.
[Exit]
This menu item quits the debugger. It performs the same function when the q
command is executed.
8.6.3 [Run] Menu
[Go]
This menu item executes the target program from the address indicated by the
current PC. It performs the same function when the g command is executed.
[Go to Cursor]
This menu item executes the target program from the address indicated by the
current PC to the cursor position in the [Source] window (the address of that
line). It performs the same function when the g <address> command is
executed.
Before this menu item can be selected, the [Source] window must be open and
the address line where the program is to break must be clicked. Selecting a
break address by clicking on the address line is valid for only the lines that
have actual code, and is invalid for the source-only lines.
[Go from Reset]
This menu item resets the CPU and then executes the target program from the
program start address (0x0110). It performs the same function when the gr
command is executed.
[Step]
This menu item executes one instruction step at the address indicated by the
current PC. It performs the same function when the s command is executed.
[Next]
This menu item executes one instruction step at the address indicated by the
current PC. If the instruction to be executed is calr, calz or int, it is assumed
that a program section until control returns to the next address constitutes one
step and all steps of their subroutines are executed. This menu item performs
the same function when the n command is executed.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
133
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
[Command File...]
This menu item reads a command file and executes the debug commands written
in that file. It performs the same function when the com or cmw command is
executed.
[Reset CPU]
This menu item resets the CPU. It performs the same function when the rst com-
mand is executed.
8.6.4 [Break] Menu
[Breakpoint Set...]
This menu item displays, sets or clears PC breakpoints using a dialog box. It
performs the same function as executing the bp command.
[Data Break...]
This menu item displays, sets or clears data break conditions using a dialog box. It
performs the same function as executing the bd command.
[Register Break...]
This menu item displays, sets or clears register break conditions using a dialog
box. It performs the same function as executing the br command.
[Sequential Break...]
This menu item displays, sets or clears sequential break conditions using a dialog
box. It performs the same function as executing the bs command.
[Stack Break...]
This menu item displays or sets stack break conditions using a dialog box. It
performs the same function as executing the bsp command.
[Break List]
This menu item displays the all break conditions that have been set. It performs the
same function as executing the bl command.
[Break All Clear]
This menu item clears all break conditions. It performs the same function as
executing the bac command.
8.6.5 [Trace] Menu
[Trace Mode Set...]
This menu item sets a trace mode and trace conditions using a dialog box. It
performs the same function as executing the tm command.
[Trace Search...]
This menu item searches trace information from the trace memory under the
condition specified using a dialog box. It performs the same function as executing
the ts command.
[Trace File...]
This menu item saves the specified range of the trace information displayed in the
[Trace] window to a file. It performs the same function as executing the tf com-
mand.
134
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.6.6 [View] Menu
[Command]
This menu item activates the [Command] window.
[Program]
This menu item opens or activates the [Source]
window and displays the program from the current
PC address in the display mode selected from the
sub menu items. These sub menu items perform the
same functions as executing the u, sc, and m com-
mand, respectively.
[Data Dump]
This menu item opens or activates the [Data] window and displays the data memory
contents from the memory start address.
[Register]
This menu item opens or activates the [Register] window and displays the current
values of the registers.
[Trace]
This menu item opens or activates the [Trace] window and displays the trace data
sampled in the ICE trace memory.
[Toolbar]
This menu item shows or hides the toolbar.
[Status Bar]
This menu item shows or hides the status bar.
8.6.7 [Option] Menu
[Log...]
This menu item starts or stops logging using a dialog box. It performs the same
function as executing the log command.
[Record...]
This menu item starts or stops recording of a command execution using a dialog
box. It performs the same function as executing the rec command.
[Mode Setting...]
This menu item sets the on-the-fly display, break and execution counter modes using
a dialog box. It performs the same functions as executing the md command.
8.6.8 [Windows] Menu
[Cascade]
This menu item cascades the opened windows.
[Tile]
This menu item tiles the opened windows.
This menu shows the currently opened window names. Selecting one activates the
window.
8.6.9 [Help] Menu
[Contents...]
This menu item displays the contents of help topics.
[About Db63...]
This menu item displays an About dialog box for the debugger.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
135
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.7 Method for Executing Commands
All debug functions can be performed by executing debug commands. This section describes how to
execute these commands. Refer to the description of each command for command parameters and other
details.
To execute a debug command, activate the [Command] window and input the command from the
keyboard. The menu and tool bar can be used to execute frequently-used commands.
8.7.1 Entering Commands from Keyboard
Select the [Command] window (by clicking somewhere on the [Command] window). When the prompt
">" appears on the last line in this window and a cursor is blinking behind it, the system is ready to
accept a command from the keyboard.
Input a debug command at the prompt position. The commands are not case-sensitive; they can be input
in either uppercase or lowercase.
General command input format
>command [ parameter [ parameter ... parameter ] ] ↵
• A space is required between a command and parameter.
• A space is required between parameters.
Use the arrow keys, [Back Space] key, or [Delete] key to correct erroneous input.
When you press the [Enter] key after entering a command, the system executes that command. (If the
command entered is accompanied by guidance, the command is executed when the necessary data is
input according to the displayed guidance.)
Input example:
>g↵
(Only a command is input.)
>com test.cmd↵
(A command and parameter are input.)
Command input accompanied by guidance
For commands that cannot be executed unless a parameter or the commands that modify the existing
data are specified, a guidance mode is entered when only a command is input. In this mode, the
system brings up a guidance field, so input a parameter there.
Input example:
>lf↵
File name ? test.abs↵ ... Input data according to the guidance (underlined part).
>
• Commands requiring parameter input as a precondition
The lf command shown in the above example reads an absolute object file into the debugger. Com-
mands like this that require an entered parameter as a precondition are not executed until the param-
eter is input and the [Enter] key pressed. If a command has multiple parameters to be input, the
system brings up the next guidance, so be sure to input all necessary parameters sequentially. If the
[Enter] key is pressed without entering a parameter in some guidance session of a command, the
system assumes the command is canceled and does not execute it.
136
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
• Commands that replace existing data after confirmation
The commands that rewrite memory or register contents one by one provide the option of skipping
guidance (do not modify the contents), returning to the immediately preceding guidance, or terminat-
ing during the input session.
[Enter] key ......... Skips input.
[^] key ................ Returns to the immediately preceding guidance.
[q] key ................ Terminates the input session.
Input example:
>de↵
... Command to modify data memory.
... Inputs the start address.
... Modifies address 0x0000 to 1.
... Returns to the immediately preceding address.
... Inputs address 0x0000 back again.
... Skips address 0x0001 by pressing [Enter] alone.
Data enter address ? :0↵
0000 A:1↵
0001 A:^↵
0000 1:0↵
0001 A:↵
0002 A:↵
0001 A:q↵
>
... Terminates the input session.
Numeric data format of parameter
For numeric values to be accepted as a parameter, they must be input in hexadecimal numbers for
almost all commands. However, some parameters accept decimal or binary numbers.
The following characters are valid for specifying numeric data:
Hexadecimal:0–9, a–f, A–F, ∗
Decimal:
0–9
Binary:
0, 1, ∗
("∗" is used to mask bits when specifying a data pattern.)
Specification with a symbol
For address specifications, symbols defined in the source can also be used. However, it is necessary to
load an absolute object file that contains debug information.
Symbols should be used as follows:
Global symbol @<symbol name>
e.g. @RAM_BLK1
Successive execution using the [Enter] key
The commands listed below can be executed successively by using only the [Enter] key after execut-
ing once. Successive execution here means repeating the previous operation or continuous display of
the previous contents.
Execution commands: g (go), s (step), n (next), com (execute command file)
Display commands:
sc (source), m (mix), u (unassemble), dd (data memory dump),
od (option data dump), td (trace data display), cv (coverage), sy (symbol list),
ma (map information)
The successive execution function is terminated when some other command is executed.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
137
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.7.2 Executing from Menu or Tool Bar
The menu and tool bar are assigned frequently-used commands as described in Sections 8.5 and 8.6. A
command can be executed simply by selecting desired menu command or clicking on the tool bar button.
Table 8.7.2.1 lists the commands assigned to the menu and tool bar.
Table 8.7.2.1 Commands that can be specified from menu or tool bar
Command
Function
Menu
Button
lf
Load IEEE-695 absolute object file
[File | Load File...]
lo
g
Load Motorola-S file
[File | Load Option...]
[Run | Go]
Execute program successively
g <address> Execute program to <address> successively
[Run | Go to Cursor]
gr
Reset CPU and execute program successively
Step into
[Run | Go from Reset]
[Run | Step]
s
n
Step over
[Run | Next]
com, cmw
Load and execute command file
Reset CPU
[Run | Command File...]
[Run | Reset CPU]
–
rst
bp, bc (bpc)
Set/clear PC breakpoint
Set/clear data break
Set/clear register break
Set/clear sequential break
Set stack break
[Break | Breakpoint Set...]
[Break | Data Break...]
[Break | Register Break...]
[Break | Sequential Break...]
[Break | Stack Break...]
[Break | Break List...]
[Break | Break All Clear]
[Trace | Trace Mode Set...]
[Trace | Trace Search...]
[Trace | Trace File...]
bd, bdc
br, brc
bs, bsc
bsp
bl
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Break list
bac
tm
Clear all break conditions
Set trace mode
ts
Search trace information
Save trace information to a file
Unassemble display
Source display
tf
u
[View | Program | Unassemble]
[View | Program | Source Display]
[View | Program | Mix Mode]
[File | Flash Memory Operation...]
[File | Flash Memory Operation...]
[File | Flash Memory Operation...]
[View | Data Dump]
sc
m
Mix display
lfl
Load from flash memory
Save to flash memory
Erase flash memory
Dump data memory
Display register values
Display trace information
Turn log output on or off
Record commands to a command file
Set modes
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
sfl
efl
dd
rd
[View | Register]
td
[View | Trace]
log
rec
md
[Option | Log...]
[Option | Record...]
[Option | Mode Setting...]
138
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.7.3 Executing from a Command File
Another method for executing commands is to use a command file that contains descriptions of a series
of debug commands. By reading a command file into the debugger the commands written in it can be
executed.
Creating a command file
Create a command file as a text file using an editor.
Although there are no specific restrictions on the extension of a file name, Seiko Epson recommends
using ".cmd".
Command files can also be created using the rec command. The rec command creates a command file
and saves the executed commands to the file.
Example of a command file
The example below shows a command group necessary to read an object file and an option file.
Example: File name = startup.cmd
lf test.abs
lo test.fsa
lo test.ssa
A command file to write the commands that come with a guidance mode can be executed. In this case,
be sure to break the line for each guidance input item as a command is written.
Reading in and executing a command file
There are two methods to read a command file into the debugger and to execute it, as described
below.
(1) Execution by the start-up option
By specifying a command file in the debugger start-up command, one command file can be executed
when the debugger starts up.
If the above example of a command file is specified, for example, the necessary files are read into the
debugger immediately after the debugger starts up, so everything is ready to debug the program.
Example: Startup command of the debugger
db63 startup.cmd par63xxx.par
(2) Execution by a command
The debugger has the com and cmw commands available that can be used to execute a command file.
The com command reads in a specified file and executes the commands in that file sequentially in the
order they are written.
The cmw command performs the same function as the com command except that each command is
executed at intervals specified by the md command (1 to 256 seconds).
Examples: com startup.cmd
cmw test.cmd
The commands written in the command file are displayed in the [Command] window.
Restrictions
Another command file can be read from within a command file. However, nesting of these command
files is limited to a maximum of five levels. An error is assumed and the subsequent execution is
halted when the com or cmw command at the sixth level is encountered.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
139
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.7.4 Log File
The executed commands and the execution results can be saved to a file in text format that is called a "log
file". This file allows verification of the debug procedures and contents.
The contents displayed in the [Command] window are saved to this file.
Command example
>log tst.log
After the debugger is set to the log mode by the log command (after it starts outputting to a log file),
the log command toggles (output turned on in log mode ↔ output turned off in normal mode).
Therefore, you can output only the portions needed can be output to the log file.
Display of [Command] window in log mode
The contents displayed in the [Command] window during log mode differ from those appearing in
normal mode.
(1) When executing a command when each window is open
(When the window that displays the command execution result is opened)
Normal mode: The contents of the relevant display window are updated. The execution results are
not displayed in the [Command] window.
Log mode:
The same contents as those displayed in the relevant window are also displayed in the
[Command] window. However, changes made to the relevant window by scrolling or
opening it are not reflected in the [Command] window.
(2) When executing a command while each window is closed
When the relevant display window is closed, the execution results are always displayed in the
[Command] window regardless of whether operation is in log mode or normal mode.
For the display format in the [Command] window, refer to each command description.
140
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.8 Debug Functions
This section outlines the debug features of the debugger, classified by function.
Refer to Section 8.9, "Command Reference" for details about each debug command.
8.8.1 Loading Program and Data Files
Loading files
The debugger can read a file in IEEE-695 format or Motorola-S format in the debugging process.
Table 8.8.1.1 lists the files that can be read by the debugger and the load commands.
Table 8.8.1.1 Files and load commands
File type
Data type
Ext.
Generation tool
Com.
Menu
Button
IEEE-695 Program/data
.abs Linker
lf
[File | Load File...]
Motorola-S Program (5 high-order bits) .hsa HEX convertor
Program (8 low-order bits) .lsa HEX convertor
lo
[File | Load Option...]
Function option
Segment option
Melody data
.fsa Function option generator
.ssa Segment option generator
.msa Melody assembler
(Ext. = Extension, Com. = Command)
Debugging a program with source display
To debug a program using the source display and symbols, the object file must be in IEEE-695 format
read into the debugger. If any other program file is read, only the unassemble display is produced.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
141
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.8.2 Source Display and Symbolic Debugging Function
The debugger allows program debugging while displaying the assembly source statements. Address
specification using a symbol name is also possible.
Displaying program code
The [Source] window displays the program in the specified display mode. The display mode can be
selected from among the three modes: Unassemble mode, Source mode, Mix mode.
Table 8.8.2.1 Commands/tool bar buttons to switch display mode
Display mode Command
Menu
Button
Unassemble
Source
Mix
u
[View | Program | Unassemble]
sc
m
[View | Program | Source Display]
[View | Program | Mix Mode]
(1) Unassemble mode
In this mode, the debugger displays the program codes after unassembling into mnemonics.
(2) Source mode
In this mode, the source that contains the code at the current PC address is displayed like an editor
screen. This mode is available only when an absolute object file that contains source debugging
information has been loaded.
142
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
(3) Mix mode
In this mode, both unassembled codes and sources are displayed like an absolute list. This mode is
available only when an absolute object file that contains source debugging information has been
loaded.
Refer to Section 8.4.3, "[Source] Window" for details about the display contents.
Symbol reference
When debugging a program after reading an object file in IEEE-695 format, the symbols defined in the
source file can be used to specify an address. This feature can be used when entering a command
having <address> in its parameter from the [Command] window or a dialog box.
(1) Referencing global symbols
Follow the method below to specify a symbol that is declared to be a global symbol/label by the
.global or .comm pseudo-instruction.
@<symbol>
Example of specification:
>m @BOOT
>de @RAM_BLK1
(2) Referencing local symbols
Follow the method below to specify a local symbol/label that is used in only the defined source file.
@<symbol>@<file name>
The file name here is the source file name (.s) in which the symbol is defined.
Example of specification:
>bp @[email protected]
(3) Displaying symbol list
All symbols used in the program and the defined addresses can be displayed in the [Command]
window.
Table 8.8.2.2 Command to display symbol list
Function
Command
Displaying symbol list
sy
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
143
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.8.3 Displaying and Modifying Program, Data, Option Data and Register
The debugger has functions to operate on the program memory, data memory, and registers, as well as
option data. Each memory area is set to the debugger according to the map information that is given in a
parameter file.
Operating on program memory area
The following operations can be performed on the program memory area:
Table 8.8.3.1 Commands to operate on program memory
Function
Command
pe
Entering/modifying program code
In-line assemble
a (as)
pf
Rewriting specified area
Copying specified area
pm
(1) Entering/modifying program code
The program code at a specified address is modified by entering hexadecimal data.
(2) In-line assemble
The program code at a specified address is modified by entering a mnemonic code.
(3) Rewriting specified area
An entire specified area is rewritten with specified code.
(4) Copying specified area
The content of a specified area is copied to another area.
Operating on data memory area
The following operations can be performed on the data memory areas (RAM, data ROM, display
memory, I/O memory):
Table 8.8.3.2 Commands/menu item to operate on data memory
Function
Command
Menu
Dumping data memory
Entering/modifying data
Rewriting specified area
Copying specified area
dd
de
df
[View | Data Dump]
–
–
–
dm
(1) Dumping data memory
The contents of the data memory are displayed in hexadecimal dump format. If the [Data] window is
opened, the contents of the [Data] window are updated; if not, the contents of the data memory are
displayed in the [Command] window.
(2) Entering/modifying data
Data at a specified address is rewritten by entering hexadecimal data. Data can be directly modified
on the [Data] window.
144
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
(3) Rewriting specified area
An entire specified area is rewritten with specified data.
(4) Copying specified area
The content of a specified area is copied to another area.
(5) Monitoring memory
The memory content displayed
at the left indicates data at a
specified address, and the one
displayed at the right indicates
4-word data at the high-order
address.
Four memory locations, each with area to store 4
consecutive words, can be registered as watch
data addresses. The registered watch data can be
verified in the [Register] window. The content of
this window is updated in real time at 0.5-second
intervals by the on-the-fly function. Addresses 0,
4, 8, and C are made the watch data addresses by
default.
Monitor data
Operating registers
The following operations can be performed on registers:
Table 8.8.3.3 Commands/menu items to operate registers
Function
Command
Menu
Displaying registers
Modifying register values
rd
rs
[View | Register]
–
(1) Displaying registers
Register contents can be displayed in the [Register] or [Command]
window.
Registers: PC, A, B, X and [X], Y and [Y], F, SP1, SP2, EXT, and QUEUE
While the program is being executed, the PC address and F register are
updated in real time every 0.5 seconds by the on-the-fly function.
(2) Modifying register values
The contents of the above registers can be set to any desired value.
The register values can be directly modified on the [Register] window.
Displaying option data
Option data in the ICE option areas (function option data, segment option data, or melody data). Data
is displayed in the [Command] window in hexadecimal dump format.
Table 8.8.3.4 Command to display option data
Function
Command
Displaying option data
od
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
145
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.8.4 Executing Program
The debugger can execute the target program successively or execute instructions one step at a time
(single-stepping).
Successive execution
(1) Types of successive execution
There are two types of successive execution available:
• Successive execution from the current PC
• Successive execution from the program start address (0x0110) after resetting the CPU
Table 8.8.4.1 Commands/menu items/tool bar buttons for successive execution
Function
Command
Menu
Button
Successive execution from current PC
g
[Run | Go]
[Run | Go to Cursor]
[Run | Go from Reset]
Successive execution after resetting CPU
gr
(2) Stopping successive execution
Using the successive execution command (g), can specify up to two temporary break addresses that
are only effective during program execution.
The temporary break address can also be specified from the [Source] window (one location only).
If the cursor is placed on an address line in the [Source] window and the [Go to Cursor] button
clicked, the program starts executing from the current PC address and breaks before executing the
instruction at the address the cursor is placed.
Except being stopped by this temporary break, the program continues execution until it is stopped by
one of the following causes:
• Break conditions set by a break set up command are met.
• The [Key Break] button is clicked or the [Esc] key is pressed.
• A map break, etc. occurs.
[Key Break] button
∗ When the program does not stop, use this button to forcibly stop it.
(3) On-the-fly function
The ICE and debugger provide the on-the-fly function to display the PC address, F register and
watch data values every 0.5 seconds (default) during successive execution. These contents are dis-
played in the relevant positions of the [Register] window. If the [Register] window is closed, they are
displayed in the [Command] window. In the initial debugger settings, the display update interval of
the on-the-fly function is set to twice per second. It can be modified to 0 (OFF)–5 (times) per second
using the md command. This function provides a complete real-time display that is implemented
using the ICE hardware.
146
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
Single-stepping
(1) Types of single-stepping
There are two types of single-stepping available:
• Stepping through all instructions (STEP)
All instructions are executed one step at a time according to the PC, regardless of the type of
instruction.
• Stepping through instructions except subroutines (NEXT)
The calr, calz and int instructions are executed under the assumption that one step constitutes the
range of statements until control is returned to the next step by a return instruction. Other instruc-
tions are executed in the same way as in ordinary single-stepping.
In either case, the program starts executing from the current PC.
Table 8.8.4.2 Commands/menu items/tool bar buttons for single-stepping
Function
Command
Menu
Button
Stepping through all instructions
s
[Run | Step]
Stepping through all instructions except subroutines
n
[Run | Next]
When executing single-stepping by command input, the number of steps to be executed can be
specified, up to 65,535 steps. When using menu commands or tool bar buttons, the program is ex-
ecuted one step at a time.
In the following cases, single-stepping is terminated before a specified number of steps is executed:
• When the [Key Break] button is clicked or the [Esc] key is pressed.
• When a map break or similar break occurs.
Single-stepping is not suspended by breaks set by the user such as a PC break or data break.
[Key Break] button ∗ When the program does not stop, use this button to forcibly stop it.
(2) Display during single-stepping
In the initial debugger settings, the display is updated as follows:
The display contents of the [Register] window are updated every step. If the [Register] window is
closed, its contents are displayed in the [Command] window. This default display mode can be
switched over by the md command so that the display contents are updated at only the last step in a
specified number of steps.
The display of the [Source] and [Data] windows are updated after the specified number of step
executions are completed.
(3) HALT and SLEEP states and interrupts
The CPU is placed in a standby mode when the halt or slp instruction is executed. An interrupt is
required to cancel this mode.
The debugger has a mode to enable or disable an external interrupt for use in single-step operation.
Table 8.8.4.3 External interrupt modes
Enable mode
Disable mode
External interrupt
Interrupt is processed.
Interrupt is not processed.
halt and slp instructions
Executed as the halt instruction. The halt and slp instructions are
Processing is continued by an
external interrupt or clicking on
the [Key Break] button.
replaced with a nop instruction as
the instruction is executed.
In the initial settings, the debugger is set to the interrupt disable mode. The interrupt enable mode can
also be set by using the md command.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
147
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
Measuring execution cycles/execution time
(1) Execution cycle counter and measurement mode
The ICE contains a 31-bit execution cycle counter allowing you to measure the program execution
time or the number of bus cycles executed. The measurement mode (time or bus cycle) can be selected
using the md command. In the initial debugger settings, the bus cycle mode is selected.
The following lists the maximum values that can be measured by the execution cycle counter:
Execution time mode: 2,147,483,647 µsec = approx. 36 min.
Bus cycle mode: 2,147,483,647 cycles
(error = 1 µsec)
(error = 0)
(2) Displaying measurement results
The measurement result is displayed in the [Register] window. This display is cleared during program
execution and is updated after completion of execution. If the [Register] window is closed, the
measurement result can be displayed in the [Command] window using the rd command. The execu-
tion results of single-stepping are also displayed here.
If the counter's maximum count is exceeded, the system indicates "over flow".
(3) Hold mode and reset mode
In the initial debugger settings, the execution cycle counter is set to hold mode. In this mode, the
measured values are combined until the counter is reset.
The reset mode can be set by the md command. In this mode, the counter is reset each time the
program is executed. In successive execution, the counter is reset when the program is made to start
executing by entering the g command and measurement is taken until the execution is terminated
(beak occurs). (The same applies for the gr command except that the counter is reset simultaneously when
the CPU is reset. Consequently, the counter operates the same way in both hold and reset modes.)
In single-stepping, the counter is reset when the program is made to start executing by entering the s
or n command and measurement is taken until execution of a specified number of steps is completed.
The counter is reset every step if execution of only one step is specified or execution is initiated by a
tool bar button or menu command.
(4) Resetting execution cycle counter
The execution cycle counter is reset in the following cases:
• When the CPU is reset with the rst command, [Reset] in the [Run] menu, or the [Reset] button
• When the gr command or [Go from Reset] in the [Run] menu is executed
• When the execution cycle counter mode is switched over by the md command (between execution
time and bus cycle modes or between hold and reset modes)
• When program execution is started in reset mode
Resetting the CPU
The CPU is reset when the gr command is executed, or by executing the rst command.
When the CPU is reset, the internal circuits are initialized as follows:
(1) Internal registers of the CPU
PC
A, B
... 0x0110
... 0xa
X, Y, QUEUE
F
SP1, SP2, EXT
... 0xaaaa
... 0b0000
... 0xaa
(2) The execution cycle counter is reset to 0.
(3) The [Source] and [Register] windows are redisplayed.
Because the PC is set to 0x0110, the [Source] window is redisplayed beginning with that address.
The [Register] window is redisplayed with the internal circuits initialized as described above.
The data memory contents are not modified.
148
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.8.5 Break Functions
The target program is made to stop executing by one of the following causes:
• Break command conditions are satisfied.
• The [Key Break] button is activated.
• The ICE BRKIN pin is pulled low.
• A map break or similar break occurs.
Break by command
The debugger has five types of break functions that allow the break conditions to be set by a com-
mand. When the set conditions in one of these break functions are met, the program under execution
is made to break.
(1) Break by PC
This function causes the program to break when the PC matches the set address. The program is made
to break before executing the instruction at that address. The PC breakpoints can be set for multiple
addresses.
Table 8.8.5.1 Commands/menu items/tool bar button to set breakpoints
Function
Command
Menu
Button
Set breakpoints
bp
[Break | Breakpoint Set...]
Clear breakpoints bc (bpc) [Break | Breakpoint Set...]
The addresses that are set as PC breakpoints are marked with a ● as they are displayed in the [Source]
window.
Using the [Break] button easily allows the setting and canceling of breakpoints.
Click on the address line in the [Source] window at where the program break is desired (after moving
the cursor to that position) and then click on the [Break] button. A ● mark will be placed at the
beginning of the line indicating that a breakpoint has been set there, and the address is registered in
the breakpoint list. Clicking on the line that begins with a ● and then the [Break] button cancels the
breakpoint you have set, in which case the address is deleted from the breakpoint list.
∗ The temporary break addresses that can be specified by the successive execution commands (g) do not
affect the set addresses in the breakpoint list.
(2) Data break
This break function allows a break to be executed when a location in the specified data memory area
is accessed. In addition to specifying a memory area in which to watch accesses, specification as to
whether the break is to be caused by a read or write, as well as specification of the content of the data
read or written. The read/write condition can be masked, so that a break will be generated for
whichever operation, read or write, is attempted. Similarly, the data condition can also be masked in
bit units. A break occurs after completing the cycle in which an operation to satisfy the above speci-
fied condition is performed.
Table 8.8.5.2 Commands/menu item to set data break
Function
Command
bd
Menu
Set data break condition
Clear data break condition
[Break | Data Break...]
[Break | Data Break...]
bdc
For example, if the program is executed after setting the data break condition as Address = 0x10, Data
pattern = ∗ (mask) and R/W = W, the program breaks after writing any data to the data memory
address 0x10.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
149
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
(3) Register break
This break function causes a break when the A, B, F, X, and Y register reach a specified value. Each
register can be masked (so they are not included in break conditions). The F register can be masked in
bit units. A break occurs when the above registers are modified to satisfy all set conditions.
Table 8.8.5.3 Commands/menu item to set register break
Function
Command
Menu
Set register break conditions
Clear register break conditions
br
[Break | Register Break...]
[Break | Register Break...]
brc
For example, if the program is executed after setting 0 for the data of the A register and "∗∗1∗" for the
data of the F register (C flag = 1) and masking all others, the program breaks when the A register is
cleared to 0 and the C flag is set to 1.
(4) Sequential break
This break function allows settings of up to three break addresses and the number of times the
instructions of the last address to be executed. While passing through all addresses sequentially in the
order set, the program executes instructions at the final specified address the directed number of
times, and then fetches the instruction at that address one more time before it breaks.
Table 8.8.5.4 Commands/menu item to set sequential break
Function
Command
bs
Menu
Set sequential break conditions
Clear sequential break conditions
[Break | Sequential Break...]
[Break | Sequential Break...]
bsc
For example, if you execute the program after first setting a break address in two locations at ad-
dresses 0x1000 and 0x2000 and specifying 3 for the execution count using the bs command, the
program executes address 0x2000 three times after executing address 0x1000 more than one time, and
when the PC reaches 0x2000, it breaks before performing the 4th execution.
The execution count can be set up to 4,095.
(5) Accessing outside stack area
In this case, a break occurs when a location outside the stack area is accessed by stack pointer SP1 or
SP2.
Before this function can be used, the SP1 and SP2 areas must be set by the bsp command. The initial
value is 0x0 to 0x3ff for SP1, and 0x0 to 0xff for SP2. The address of SP1 must be specified in units of 4
words.
Table 8.8.5.5 Command/menu item to set stack break
Function
Command
Menu
Set stack break conditions
bsp
[Break | Stack Break...]
Forced break by the [Key Break] button or the [Esc] key
The [Key Break] button or the [Esc] key can be used to forcibly terminate the program under execu-
tion when the program has fallen into an endless loop or cannot exit a standby (HALT or SLEEP)
state.
[Key Break] button
Pulling ICE BRKIN pin low
The program is made to break by pulling the ICE BRKIN pin low (by applying a low-level pulse
for more than 20 ns).
150
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
Map break and illegal instruction break
The program also breaks when one of the following errors is encountered during program execution:
(1) Access to undefined program area
A break occurs when an undefined area of the program memory map is accessed.
(2) Access to undefined data area
A break occurs when an undefined area of the data memory map is accessed.
(3) Write to data ROM area
A break occurs when a write to the data ROM area is attempted.
Notes: • If the return address is popped from the stack by a ret or reti instruction in an area with prohib-
ited 16-bit access, invalid data is read out from a 16-bit data bus that does not have any memory
connected. In the ICE, because the bus is pulled up, 0xffff is read out, causing control to
return to that address. This could result in generating a map break.
• A break caused by an undefined program area access occurs before execution of such opera-
tion. On the other hand, a map break caused by access to an undefined data area or a write to
the data ROM area occurs one or two instructions after execution of such operation.
• In user breaks based on command settings also, a PC break and sequential break occur before
execution of operation. However, other breaks such as a data break, register break, and stack
break occur one or two instructions after execution of operation.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
151
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.8.6 Trace Functions
The debugger has a function to trace program execution.
Trace memory and trace information
The ICE contains a trace memory. When the program executes instructions in the trace range
according to the trace mode, the trace information on each cycle is taken into this memory. The trace
memory has the capacity to store information for 8,192 cycles, making it possible to trace up to 4,096
instructions (for two-clock instructions only). When the trace information exceeds this capacity, the
data is overwritten, the oldest data first unless operating in single-delay trigger mode. Consequently,
the trace information stored in the trace memory is always within 8,192 cycles. The trace memory is
cleared when a program is executed, starting to trace the new execution data.
The following lists the trace information that is taken into the trace memory in every cycle. This list is
corresponded to display in the [Trace] window.
trace cycle:
Trace cycle (decimal). The last information taken into the trace memory becomes
00001.
fetch addr:
Fetch address (hexadecimal).
fetch code disasm:Fetch code (hexadecimal) and disassembled content.
register:
flag:
data:
Values of A, B, X, and Y registers after cycle execution (hexadecimal).
States of E, I, C, and Z flags after cycle execution (binary).
Accessed data memory address (hexadecimal), read/write (denoted by r or w at
the beginning of data), and data (1-digit hexadecimal for 4-bit access; 4-digit
hexadecimal for 16-bit access).
SP:
Stack access (1 for SP1 access; 2 for SP2 access).
trace in:
Input to TRCIN pin (denoted by L when low-level signal is input).
Notes: The S1C63000 CPU uses two-stage pipelined instruction processing, one for fetch and one for
execution. Therefore, please pay attention to the following:
• The CPU fetches the next instruction in the last execution cycle of an instruction. Because the
instruction is executed beginning from the cycle which is after the fetch, the displayed states of
the registers, etc. are not the execution results of the fetch instruction that is displayed on the
same line.
• For reasons of the ICE operation timing, the trace data at the boundary of operations, such
as in the fetch cycle at which trace starts or the execution cycle at which trace ends, will not
always be stored in memory.
152
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
Trace modes
Three trace modes are available, depending on the method for sampling trace information.
Table 8.8.6.1 Trace mode setup command
Function
Command
Menu
Set trace mode
tm
[Trace | Trace Mode Set...]
(1) Normal trace mode
In this mode, the trace information on all bus cycles is taken into the trace memory during program
execution. Therefore, until a break occurs, the trace memory always contains the latest information on
bus cycles up to the one that is executed immediately beforehand.
(2) Single delay trigger trace mode
In this mode as in other modes, trace is initiated by a start of program execution. When the address
(trace trigger point) that is set by the tm command is executed, trace is performed beginning from that
point before being halted according to the next setting, which is also set by the command.
• If the trace trigger point is set to "start"
Trance is halted after sampling trace information for 8,192 cycles beginning from the trace trigger
point. In this case, the trace information at the trace trigger point is the oldest information stored
in the trace memory.
If the program stops before tracing all 8,192 cycles, trace information on some cycles preceding the
trace trigger point may be left in the trace memory within its capacity.
Trace trigger point
Execution started
8,192 cycles
Trace sampling range
Fig. 8.8.6.1 Trace range when "start" is selected
• If the trace trigger point is set to "middle"
Trace is halted after sampling trace information for 4,096 cycles beginning from the trace trigger
point. In this case, the trace information of 4,096 cycles before and after the trace trigger point are
sampled into the trace memory.
If the program stops before tracing all 4,096 cycles, trace information for the location 4,096 cycles
before the trace trigger point may be left in the trace memory, according to its capacity.
Trace trigger point
Execution started
(4,096 cycles) 4,096 cycles
Trace sampling range
Fig. 8.8.6.2 Trace range when "middle" is selected
• If the trace trigger point is set to "end"
Trace is halted after sampling trace information at the trace trigger point. In this case, the trace
information at the trace trigger point is the latest information stored in the trace memory.
If the program stops before tracing the trace trigger point, the system operates in the same way as
in normal mode.
Trace trigger point
Execution started
8,192 cycles
Trace sampling range
Fig. 8.8.6.3 Trace range when "end" is selected
If the program is halted in the middle of single delay trigger trace, bus cycles are traced from the
beginning when trace is executed next.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
153
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
(3) Address-area trace
In this mode, trace information is taken into the trace memory only when instructions within (or
outside) a specified address range are executed. This address range can be set in up to four locations
by the tm command. Whether you want trace to be performed within or outside that address range
can also be specified by a command.
∗ Trace trigger address
The tm command sets a trace trigger address regardless of the trace mode specified. When the
[Source] window is open, the address thus set is marked by a "T" at the beginning of the address.
When the program executes that address, the ICE outputs a low-level pulse from its TRGOUT pin.
Displaying and searching trace information
The sampled trace information can be displayed in the [Trace] window by a command. If the [Trace]
window is closed, the information is displayed in the [Command] window. In the [Trace] window, the
entire trace memory data can be seen by scrolling the window. The trace information can be displayed
beginning from a specified cycle.
The display contents are as described above.
Table 8.8.6.2 Command/menu item to display trace information
Function
Command
Menu
Display trace information
td
[View | Trace]
It is possible to specify a search condition and display the trace information that matches a specified
condition.
The search condition can be selected from the following three:
1. Program's execution address
2. Address from which data is read
3. Address to which data is written
When the above condition and one address are specified, the system starts searching. When the trace
information that matches the specified condition is found, the system displays the found data in the
[Trace] window (or in the [Command] window if the [Trace] window is closed).
Table 8.8.6.3 Command/menu item to search trace information
Function
Command
Menu
Search trace information
ts
[Trace | Trace Search...]
Saving trace information
After the trace information is displayed in the [Trace] window using the td or ts commands, the trace
information within the specified range can be saved to a file.
Table 8.8.6.4 Command/menu item to save trace information
Function
Command
Menu
Save trace information
tf
[Trace | Trace File...]
154
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.8.7 Operation of Flash Memory
The ICE in-circuit emulator contains flash memory. This memory is designed to allow data to be
transferred to and from the ICE's emulation memory and the target memory by a command.
The flash memory retains data even when the ICE is turned off. By writing the program and/or data
under debug into the flash memory before turning off the power, you can call it up and continue debug-
ging next time. Also, even when operating the ICE in free-run mode (in which a program is executed
using only the ICE), you may need to write the program into the flash memory.
The following operations can be performed on the flash memory:
(1) Read from flash memory
Data is loaded from the flash memory into the emulation and/or target memory.
(2) Write to flash memory
Data in the emulation and/or target memory is saved to the flash memory. Also, the contents of the
parameter file can be written to the flash memory as necessary. After writing to the flash memory in
this way, you can protect it against read and write.
(3) Erasing flash memory
All contents of the flash memory are erased.
Table 8.8.7.1 Commands to operate on flash memory
Function
Command
Menu
Read from flash memory
Write to flash memory
Erase flash memory
lfl
sfl
efl
[File | Flash Memory Operation...]
[File | Flash Memory Operation...]
[File | Flash Memory Operation...]
Note: Unless the contents of the parameter file that is specified when invoking Debugger db63 match the
contents of parameters in the flash memory, neither write (sfl) nor read (lfl) to and from the flash
memory can be performed. After you have received the shipment of the ICE, erased the flash
memory, or used a different parameter file (designed for some other microcomputer model in the S1
63 Family), be sure to write the contents of your parameter file along with other data into the
flash memory using the sfl command.
∗ Free-run of the ICE
When operating the ICE in free-run mode (with the program executed using only the ICE), the IC
uses the data written in the flash memory. Therefore, before the ICE can be used in free-run
mode, the entire program, data, and option data must be written into the flash memory.
To operate the ICE in free-run mode, set the ICE/RUN switch to the RUN position and turn on the
power. During free-run, map breaks caused by operation in the program and data areas set by a
parameter file are effective. When a map break occurs, the PC LED on the ICE stops and the EMU
LED turns off. All other break settings are invalid because they cannot be written into the flash
memory.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
155
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.8.8 Coverage
The ICE retains coverage information (i.e., information on addresses at which a program is executed)
and it can be displayed in the [Command] window.
Because the executed address range is displayed as shown below, it is possible to know which areas have
not been executed.
Coverage Information:
0: 0110..0118
1: 0200..020f
Table 8.8.8.1 Coverage commands
Function
Command
cv
Display coverage information
Clear coverage information
cvc
8.8.9 Writing Data to the FPGA on the Standard Peripheral Circuit Board
The standard peripheral circuit board is configured for the supported model by writing the peripheral
function data to the on-board FPGA. This writing is necessary the first time the standard peripheral
circuit board is used or before beginning development of another model.
The debugger supports the following FPGA data handling functions:
(1) Erasing FPGA
All contents of the FPGA are erased.
(2) Writing data to FPGA
Data in the specified file is written to the FPGA. Also, the write command supports erasing the FPGA.
Data for the supported models are provided as "c63xxx.mot" files in the "epson\s1c63\ice\fpga"
directory (default).
(3) FPGA data comparison
The contents of the FPGA and specified file are compared.
(4) FPGA data dump
The FPGA data is displayed in a hexadecimal dump format.
Table 8.8.9.1 FPGA commands
Function
Erase FPGA
Command
xfer/xfers
xfwr/xfwrs
xfcp/xfcps
xdp/xdps
Write to FPGA
Compare FPGA data and file
Dupm FPGA data
Note: The standard peripheral circuit board has two on-board FPGAs, main FPGA and sub FPGA, and
the different commands are provided for each FPGA (suffix "s" indicates that the command is for
the sub FPGA).
However, it is not necessary to write data to the sub FPGA normally, because the sub FPGA
contains LCD DC output function.
156
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.9 Command Reference
8.9.1 Command List
Table 8.9.1.1 lists the debug commands available with the debugger.
Table 8.9.1.1 Command list
Classification
Program memory
operation
Command
(assemble)
Function
Page
159
161
162
163
164
166
168
169
170
172
174
175
177
a / as
pe
pf
Assemble mnemonic
Input program code
Fill program area
(program memory enter)
(program memory fill)
(program memory move)
(data memory dump)
(data memory enter)
(data memory fill)
(data memory move)
(data memory watch)
(option data dump)
(register display)
(register set)
pm
dd
de
df
Copy program memory
Dump data memory
Input data
Data memory
operation
Fill data area
dm
dw
od
rd
Copy data area
Set watch data address
Dump option data
Display register values
Modify register values
Execute successively
Option information
Register operation
rs
Program execution
g
(go)
gr
(go after reset CPU)
(step)
Reset CPU and execute successively
Step into
179
180
182
183
184
186
187
189
190
192
193
195
196
198
199
200
202
204
206
207
208
209
211
213
214
216
219
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
232
233
234
235
236
237
s
n
(next)
Step over
CPU reset
Break
rst
bp
bc / bpc
bd
bdc
br
(reset CPU)
Reset CPU
(breakpoint set)
(breakpoint clear)
(data break)
Set breakpoint
Clear breakpoint
Set data break
(data break clear)
(register break)
(register break clear)
(sequential break)
(sequential break clear)
(break stack pointer)
(breakpoint list)
(break all clear)
(unassemble)
Clear data break
Set register break
brc
bs
Clear register break
Set sequential break
Clear sequential break
Specify stack area (for illegal stack access detection)
Display all break conditions
Clear all break conditions
Unassemble display
bsc
bsp
bl
bac
u
Program display
sc
(source code)
Source display
m
(mix)
Mix display
Symbol information sy
(symbol list)
List symbols
Load file
lf
(load file)
Load IEEE-695 format absolute object file
Load Motorola-S format file
Read from flash memory
Write to flash memory
Erase flash memory
lo
(load option)
Flash memory
operation
lfl
(load from flash memory)
(save to flash memory)
(erase flash memory)
(trace mode)
sfl
efl
tm
td
Trace
Set trace mode
(trace data display)
(trace search)
Display trace information
Search trace information
Save trace information into a file
Display coverage information
Clear coverage information
Load & execute command file
Load/execute command file with execution intervals
Record commands to a command file
Turn log output on or off
Display map information
Set mode
ts
tf
(trace file)
Coverage
cv
(coverage)
cvc
com
cmw
rec
log
ma
md
(coverage clear)
(execute command file)
(execute command file with wait)
(record commands to file)
(log)
Command file
Log
Map information
Mode setting
FPGA operation
(map information)
(mode)
xfer/xfers (xlinx fpga data erase)
xfwr/xfwrs (xlinx fpga data write)
xfcp/xfcps (xlinx fpga data compare)
Erase FPGA
Write to FPGA
Compare FPGA data and file
Dump FPGA data
xdp/xdps
(xlinx fpga data dump)
Quit
q
?
(quit)
Quit debugger
Help
(help)
Display command usage
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
157
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.9.2 Reference for Each Command
The following sections explain all the commands by functions.
The explanations contain the following items.
Function
Indicates the functions of the command.
Format
Indicates the keyboard input format and parameters required for execution.
Example
Indicates a sample execution of the command.
Note
Shows notes on using.
GUI utility
Indicates a menu item or tool bar button if they are available for the command.
Notes: • In the command format description, the parameters enclosed by < > indicate they are necessary
parameters that must be input by the user; while the ones enclosed by [ ] indicate they are
optional parameters.
• The input commands are case-insensitive, you can use either upper case or lower case letters
or even mixed.
• An error results if the number of parameters is not correct when you input a command using
direct input mode.
Error : Incorrect number of parameters
158
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.9.3 Program Memory Operation
a / as (assemble mnemonic)
Function
This command assembles the input mnemonic and rewrites the corresponding code to the program
memory at the specified address.
Format
(1) >a <address> <mnemonic> [<file name>]↵
(direct input mode)
(2) >a [<address>]↵
(guidance mode)
Start address ? : <address>↵
... Displayed only when <address> is omitted.
Address Original code Original mnemonic : <mnemonic>↵
..........
>
<address>:
Start address from which to write code; hexadecimal or symbol (IEEE-695 format only)
<mnemonic>: Input mnemonic; valid mnemonic of S1C63000 (expression and symbols are supported)
<file name>: File in which the symbol used in the operand was defined.
Condition:
0 ≤ address ≤ last program memory address
Examples
Format (1)
>a 200 "ld %a,f"↵
... Assembles "LD %A,0xF" and rewrites the code at address 0x200.
... Address is input.
Format (2)
>a↵
Start address ? 200↵
0200 1ff6 ld %a,%f : add %a,%b↵
Source file name (enter to ignore) ?↵
0201 1fff *nop : ^↵
... Mnemonic is input.
... Ignored ∗
... Returned to previous address.
... Input is skipped.
0200 1972 add %a,%b : ↵
0201 1fff *nop : q↵
>
... Command is terminated.
∗ Source file name should be entered when a symbol/label is used as the operand. Specify the source
file name in which the symbol was defined.
0200 1972 add %a,%b : jr LOOP↵
Source file name (enter to ignore) ? main.s↵
... Symbol is used.
... Source file name is input.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
159
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
Notes
• The a and as commands have the same function.
• The start address you specified must be within the range of the program memory area available with
each microcomputer model.
An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or not a valid symbol.
Error : invalid value
(no such symbol / symbol type error)
An error results if the limit is exceeded.
Error : Address out of range, use 0-0xXXXX
• An error results if the input mnemonic is invalid for S1C63000.
Error : illegal mnemonic
• In guidance mode, the following keyboard inputs have special meaning:
"q↵"
"^↵"
"↵"
… Command is terminated. (finish inputting and start execution)
… Return to previous address.
… Input is skipped. (keep current value)
If the maximum address of program memory is reached and gets a valid input other than "^↵", the
command is terminated.
• When the contents of the program memory are modified using the a (as) command, the unassemble
contents of the [Source] window are updated immediately.
• Although the contents of the unassemble display are modified by rewriting code, those of source
display remain unchanged.
GUI utility
None
160
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
pe (program memory enter)
Function
This command rewrites the contents of the specified address in the program memory with the input
hexadecimal code.
Format
(1) >pe <address> <code1> [<code2> [...<code8>]]↵
(direct input mode)
(2) >pe [<address>]↵
(guidance mode)
... Displayed only when <address> is omitted.
Program enter address ? <address>↵
Address Original code : <code>↵
..........
>
<address>:
Start address from which to write code; hexadecimal or symbol (IEEE-695 format only)
<code(1–8)>: Write code; hexadecimal (valid operation code of S1C63000)
Condition:
Examples
0 ≤ address ≤ last program memory address, 0 ≤ input code ≤ 0x1fff
Format (1)
>pe 200 1972↵
... Rewrites the code at address 0x200 with 0x1972 (add %a, %b).
Format (2)
>pe↵
Program enter address ? 200↵
0200 1fff : 1972↵
0201 1fff : ↵
0202 1fff : q↵
>
... Address is input.
... Code is input.
... Address 0x201 is skipped.
... Command is terminated.
Notes
• The start address you specified must be within the range of the program memory area available with
each microcomputer model.
An error results if the input one is not hexadecimal number or not a valid symbol.
Error : invalid value
(no such symbol / symbol type error)
An error results if the limit is exceeded.
Error : Address out of range, use 0-0xXXXX
• Code must be input using a hexadecimal number in the range of 13 bits (0 to 0x1fff).
An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number.
Error : invalid value
An error results if the input code exceeds the limit or it is invalidated in the .PAR file.
Error : illegal code
• In guidance mode, the following keyboard inputs have special meaning:
"q↵"
"^↵"
"↵"
… Command is terminated. (finish inputting and start execution)
… Return to previous address.
… Input is skipped. (keep current value)
If the maximum address of program memory is reached and gets a valid input other than "^↵", the
command is terminated.
• When the contents of the program memory are modified using the pe command, the unassemble
contents of the [Source] window are updated immediately.
• Although the contents of the unassemble display are modified by rewriting code, those of source
display remain unchanged.
GUI utility
None
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
161
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
pf (program memory fill)
Function
This command rewrites the contents of the specified program memory area with the specified code.
Format
(1) >pf <address1> <address2> <code>↵
(2) >pf↵
(direct input mode)
(guidance mode)
Start address ? <address1>↵
End address ? <address2>↵
Fill code ? <code>↵
>
<address1>: Start address of specified range; hexadecimal or symbol (IEEE-695 format only)
<address2>: End address of specified range; hexadecimal or symbol (IEEE-695 format only)
<code>:
Write code; hexadecimal (valid operation code of S1C63000)
Condition:
0 ≤ address1 ≤ address2 ≤ last program memory address, 0 ≤ code ≤ 0x1fff
Examples
Format (1)
>pf 200 20f 1ffe↵
... Fills the area from address 0x200 to address 0x20f with 0x1ffe (nop).
Format (2)
>pf↵
Start address ? 200↵
End address ? 20f↵
Fill code ? 1fff↵
>
... Start address is input.
... End address is input.
... Code is input.
∗ Command execution can be canceled by entering only the [Enter] key and nothing else.
Notes
• The addresses specified here must be within the range of the program memory area available with
each microcomputer model.
An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or not a valid symbol.
Error : invalid value
(no such symbol / symbol type error)
An error results if the limit is exceeded.
Error : Address out of range, use 0-0xXXXX
• An error results if the start address is larger than the end address.
Error : end address < start address
• When the contents of the program memory is modified using the pf command, the contents of the
[Source] window are updated automatically.
• Although the contents of the unassemble display are modified by rewriting code, those of source
display remain unchanged.
GUI utility
None
162
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
pm (program memory move)
Function
This command copies the content of a specified program memory area to another area.
Format
(1) >pm <address1> <address2> <address3>↵
(direct input mode)
(guidance mode)
(2) >pm↵
Start address ? <address1>↵
End address ? <address2>↵
Destination address ? <address3>↵
>
<address1>: Start address of source area to be copied from; hexadecimal or symbol (IEEE-695 format only)
<address2>: End address of source area to be copied from; hexadecimal or symbol (IEEE-695 format only)
<address3>: Address of destination area to be copied to; hexadecimal or symbol (IEEE-695 format only)
Condition: 0 ≤ address1 ≤ address2 ≤ last program memory address
0 ≤ address3 ≤ last program memory address
Examples
Format (1)
>pm 200 2ff 280↵
... Copies the codes within the range from address 0x200 to address 0x2ff
to the area from address 0x280.
Format (2)
>pm↵
Start address ? 200↵
End address ? 2ff↵
... Source area start address is input.
... Source area end address is input.
... Destination area start address is input.
Destination address ? 280↵
>
∗ Command execution can be canceled by entering only the [Enter] key and nothing else.
Notes
• The addresses you specified must be within the range of the program memory area available with
each microcomputer model.
An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or not a valid symbol.
Error : invalid value
(no such symbol / symbol type error)
An error results if the limit is exceeded.
Error : Address out of range, use 0-0xXXXX
• An error results if the start address is larger than the end address.
Error : end address < start address
• When the contents of the program memory is modified using the pm command, the contents of the
[Source] window are updated automatically.
• Although the contents of the unassemble display are modified by rewriting code, those of source
display remain unchanged.
GUI utility
None
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
163
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.9.4 Data Memory Operation
dd (data memory dump)
Function
This command displays the content of the data memory in a 16 words/line hexadecimal dump format.
Format
>dd [<address1> [<address2>]]↵
(direct input mode)
<address1>: Start address to display; hexadecimal or symbol (IEEE-695 format only)
<address2>: End address to display; hexadecimal or symbol (IEEE-695 format only)
Condition: 0 ≤ address1 ≤ address2 ≤ 0xffff
Display
(1) When [data] window is opened
If both <address1> and <address2> are not defined,
the [Data] window is redisplayed beginning with
address 0x0000.
If <address1> is defined , or even <address2> is
defined, the [Data] window is redisplayed in such a
way that <address1> is displayed at the uppermost
line.
Even when <address1> specifies somewhere in 16
addresses/line, data is displayed beginning with
the top of that line. For example, even though you
may have specified address 0xff08 for <address1>,
data is displayed beginning with address 0xff00.
However, if an address near the uppermost part of data memory (e.g. maximum address is 0xffff),
such as 0xffc0, is specified as <address1>, the last line displayed in the window in this case is 0xfff0,
the specified address is not at the top of the window.
Since the [Data] window can be scrolled to show the entire data memory, defining <address2> does
not have any specific effect. Only defining <address1> and both defining <address1> and <address2>
has same display result.
(2) When [data] window is closed
If both <address1> and <address2> are not defined, the debugger displays data for 256 words from
address 0x000 in the [Command] window.
>dd↵
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0000: A A A A D C 0 3 A A A A A A A A
0010: A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
:
:
:
00E0: A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
00F0: A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
>
If only <address1> is defined, the debugger displays data for 256 words from <address1>.
>dd ff00↵
FF00: 0 0 3 * 0 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 2 0 * *
FF10: * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
:
:
:
FFE0: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 * * * * * * * *
FFF0: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 * * * * * * * *
>
"∗" indicates an unused address.
164
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
If both <address1> and <address2> are defined, the debugger displays data from <address1> to
<address2>.
>dd 008 017↵
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0000:
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0010: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
>
(3) During log output
If a command execution is being output to a log file by the log command when you dump the data
memory, data is displayed in the [Command] window even if the [Data] window is opened and are
also output to the log file.
If the [Data] window is closed, data is displayed in the [Command] window in the same way as in (2)
above.
If the [Data] window is open, it is redisplayed to show data in the same way as in (1) above. In this
case, the same number of lines is displayed in the [Command] window as are displayed in the [Data]
window.
(4) Successive display
Once you execute the dd command, data can be displayed successively with the [Enter] key only until
some other command is executed.
When you hit the [Enter] key, the [Data] window is scrolled one full screen.
When displaying data in the [Command] window, data is displayed for the 16 lines following the
previously displayed address (same number of lines as displayed in the [Data] window during log
output).
>dd↵
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0000: A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
0010: A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
:
:
:
00F0: A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
>↵
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0100: A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
0110: A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
:
:
:
01F0: A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
>
When the line at address 0xfff0 is displayed, the system stands by waiting for command input. If you
hit the [Enter] key here, data is displayed beginning with address 0x0000.
Notes
• Both the start and end addresses specified here must be within the range of the data memory area
available with each microcomputer model.
An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or not a valid symbol.
Error : invalid value
(no such symbol / symbol type error)
An error results if the limit is exceeded.
Error : Address out of range, use 0-0xFFFF
• An error results if the start address is larger than the end address.
Error : end address < start address
GUI utility
[View | Data Dump] menu item
When this menu item is selected, the [Data] window opens or becomes active and displays the current
data memory contents.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
165
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
de (data memory enter)
Function
This command rewrites the contents of the data memory with the input hexadecimal data. Data can
be written to continuous memory locations beginning with a specified address.
Format
(1) >de <address> <data1> [<data2> [...<data16>]]↵
(direct input mode)
(guidance mode)
(2) >de↵
Data enter address ? : <address>↵
Address Original data : <data>↵
..........
>
<address>:
<data(1–16)>: Write data; hexadecimal
Condition: 0 ≤ address ≤ 0xffff, 0 ≤ data ≤ 0xf
Start address from which to write data; hexadecimal or symbol (IEEE-695 format only)
Examples
Format (1)
>de 100 0↵
... Rewrites data at address 0x100 with 0.
Format (2)
>de↵
Data enter address ? :100↵
0100 0 : a↵
0101 0 : ↵
0102 0 : q↵
>
... Address is input.
... Data is input.
... Skipped.
... Command is terminated.
Notes
• The start address specified here must be within the range of the data memory area available with each
microcomputer model.
An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or a valid symbol.
Error : invalid value
(no such symbol / symbol type error)
An error results if the limit is exceeded.
Error : Address out of range, use 0-0xFFFF
• The contents of the unused area will be marked as "∗". If you encounter any address marked by "∗",
press [Enter] key to skip that address or terminate the command.
• Data must be input using a hexadecimal number in the range of 4 bits (0–0xf). An error results if the
limit is exceeded.
Error : Data out of range, use 0-0xF
• When the contents of the data memory is modified using the de command, the displayed contents of
the [Data] window are updated automatically.
• In guidance mode, the following keyboard inputs have special meaning:
"q↵"
"^↵"
"↵"
… Command is terminated. (finish inputting and start execution)
… Return to previous address.
… Input is skipped. (keep current value)
If the maximum address of data memory is reached and gets a valid input other than "^↵", the
command is terminated.
166
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
GUI utility
[Data] window
The [Data] window allows direct modification of
data. Click the [Data] window and select the
displayed data to be modified then enter a hexadeci-
mal number.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
167
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
df (data memory fill)
Function
This command rewrites the contents of the specified data memory area with the specified data.
Format
(1) >df <address1> <address2> <data> ↵
(direct input mode)
(guidance mode)
(2) >df↵
Start address ? <address1>↵
End address ? <address2>↵
Data pattern ? <data>↵
>
<address1>: Start address of specified range; hexadecimal or symbol (IEEE-695 format only)
<address2>: End address of specified range; hexadecimal or symbol (IEEE-695 format only)
<data>:
Write data; hexadecimal
Condition: 0 ≤ address1 ≤ address2 ≤ 0xffff, 0 ≤ data ≤ 0xf
Examples
Format (1)
>df 200 2ff 0↵
... Fills the data memory area from address 0x200 to address 0x2ff with 0x0.
Format (2)
>df↵
Start address ? 200↵
End address ? 2ff↵
Data pattern ? 0↵
>
... Start address is input.
... End address is input.
... Data is input.
∗ Command execution can be canceled by entering only the [Enter] key and nothing else.
Notes
• Both the start and end addresses specified here must be within the range of the data memory area
available with each microcomputer model.
An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or a valid symbol.
Error : invalid value
(no such symbol / symbol type error)
An error results if the limit is exceeded.
Error : Address out of range, use 0-0xFFFF
• An error results if the start address is larger than the end address.
Error : end address < start address
• Data must be input using a hexadecimal number in the range of 4 bits (0 to 0xf). An error results if the
limit is exceeded.
Error : Data out of range, use 0-0xF
• Write operation is not performed to the read only address of the I/O area.
• When there is an unused area in the specified address range, no error occurs. The area other than the
unused area will be filled with the specified data.
• When the contents of the data memory is modified using the df command, the displayed contents of
the [Data] window are updated automatically.
GUI utility
None
168
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
dm (data memory move)
Function
This command copies the contents of the specified data memory area to another area.
Format
(1) >dm <address1> <address2> <address3>↵
(direct input mode)
(guidance mode)
(2) >dm↵
Start address ? <address1>↵
End address ? <address2>↵
Destination address ? <address3>↵
>
<address1>: Start address of source area to be copied from; hexadecimal or symbol (IEEE-695 format only)
<address2>: End address of source area to be copied from; hexadecimal or symbol (IEEE-695 format only)
<address3>: Address of destination area to be copied to; hexadecimal or symbol (IEEE-695 format only)
Condition: 0 ≤ address1 ≤ address2 ≤ 0xffff, 0 ≤ address3 ≤ 0xffff
Examples
Format (1)
>dm 200 2ff 280↵
... Copies data within the range from address 0x200 to address 0x2ff
to the area from address 0x280.
Format (2)
>dm↵
Start address ? 200↵
End address ? 2ff↵
Destination address 280↵
>
... Source area start address is input.
... Source area end address is input.
... Destination area start address is input.
∗ Command execution can be canceled by entering only the [Enter] key and nothing else.
Notes
• All the addresses specified here must be within the range of the data memory area available with each
microcomputer model.
An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or a valid symbol.
Error : invalid value
(no such symbol / symbol type error)
An error results if the limit is exceeded.
Error : Address out of range, use 0-0xFFFF
• Write operation is not performed to the read-only address of the I/O area.
• Data in the write-only area cannot be read. If the source area contains write-only address, 0 is written
to the corresponding destination. If the destination area contains read-only address, the data of that
address can not be rewritten. If the source and destination areas contain I/O address of mixed read-
only bits and write-only bits, either read or write operation can be executed for the corresponding
bits.
• When the contents of the data memory is modified using the dm command, the displayed contents of
the [Data] window are updated automatically.
GUI utility
None
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
169
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
dw (data memory watch)
Function
This command registers four data memory locations as the watch data addresses. Memory contents
equivalent to 4 words at each watch address are displayed in the [Register] window.
Format
(1) >dw <address1> [ ... <address4>] ↵
(direct input mode)
(guidance mode)
(2) >dw↵
Address 1 = Old value : <address1>↵
Address 2 = Old value : <address2>↵
Address 3 = Old value : <address3>↵
Address 4 = Old value : <address4>↵
>
<address1–4>: Watch address; hexadecimal or symbol (IEEE-695 format only)
Condition: 0 ≤ address1 ≤ address2 ≤ 0xffff
Examples
Format (1)
>dw 10 14 18 1C↵
... Sets watch addresses to 0x10, 0x14, 0x18, and 0x1c.
Format (2)
>dw↵
Address1 = 0010 :0↵
Address2 = 0014 :4↵
Address3 = 0018 :8↵
Address4 = 001c :c↵
>
Notes
• When the debugger starts up, four locations at addresses 0, 4, 8, and 0xc are initially set as the watch
data addresses.
• The address specified here must be within the range of the data memory area available with each
microcomputer model.
An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or a valid symbol.
Error : invalid value
(no such symbol / symbol type error)
An error results if the limit is exceeded.
Error : Address out of range, use 0-0xFFFF
• The watch data addresses are set in units of 4 words. A warning results if you specify an address that
is outside the 4-word boundary, with your specified address rounded down to a multiple of 4.
Example: >dw↵
Address1 = 0000 :0↵
Address2 = 0004 :10↵
Address3 = 0008 :15↵
... Illegal address
... Illegal address
Address4 = 000c :19↵
Warning : round down to multiple of 4
Address1 =
0
Address2 = 10
Address3 = 14
>
170
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
• Be aware that a value is displayed as the watch data even if the invalid address, which is displayed as
an "∗" in the dd command, is registered. The value in this case is indeterminate.
• The value displayed to the left shows the content of the start address, and that displayed to the right
is the content of an address that is equal to the start address + 3.
GUI utility
None
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
171
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.9.5 Command to Display Option Information
od (option data dump)
Function
This command displays option data in the [Command] window in a hexadecimal dump format after
reading it from the ICE.
Option data
Target memory address range
0 to 0xef
Function option data (fog)
Segment option data (sog)
Melody data (mla)
0 to 0x1fff
0 to 0xfff
Format
(1) >od <type> [<address1> [<address2>]]↵ (direct input mode)
(2) >od↵ (guidance mode)
1. fog 2. sog 3. mla . . . ? <type>↵
Start address ? <address1>↵
End address ? <address2>↵
Option data display . . . .
>
<type>:
Option type; fog, sog, or mla
<address1>: Start address of specified range; hexadecimal
<address2>: End address of specified range; hexadecimal
Condition: 0 ≤ address1 ≤ address2 ≤ 0xef (fog), 0x1fff (sog) or 0xfff (mla)
Examples
Format (1)
>od fog 0 f↵
... Displays function option data within the range of 0 to 0xf.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0000: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Format (2)
>od
1.fog 2.sog 3.mla ...? 1↵
Start address ? 10↵
End address ? 1f↵
... Function option is selected.
... Start address is input.
... End address is input.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0010: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
>
Notes
• The start and end addresses can be omitted by entering the [Enter] key only.
If the start address is omitted, data is displayed beginning with address 0.
If the end address is omitted, data is displayed for up to 16 lines within the range of the option area.
• Data in unused areas is marked by an "∗" as it is displayed in the window.
• The maximum number of lines that can be displayed at once is 16 (fog data is limited to 15 lines).
Even if you specify the end address in an attempt to display more than 16 lines, the system will only
display data for 16 lines and then stand by waiting for a command input. As with the dd command,
this command allows you to display data for the following addresses by entering the [Enter] key only.
(The maximam number of lines is 16.)
172
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
• Both the start and end addresses must be specified within the setup range of each option. An error
results if this limit is exceeded.
Error : FO address out of range, use 0-0xEF
... Specified address for the function option is outside the range.
Error : SO address out of range, use 0-0x1FFF
... Specified address for the segment option is outside the range.
Error : MLA address out of range, use 0-0xFFF
... Specified address for the melody data is outside the range.
• An error results if the start address is larger than the end address.
Error : end address < start address
• The default value of option data is 0.
GUI utility
None
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
173
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.9.6 Register Operation
rd (register display)
Function
This command displays the contents of the registers, execution cycle counter, and watch data.
Format
>rd↵
(direct input mode)
Display
(1) Contents of display
The following lists the contents displayed by this command.
PC:
A:
Program counter
A register
B:
B register
X:
Contents of X register and indirectly addressed data memory
Y:
Contents of Y register and indirectly addressed data memory
EICZ:
SP1:
SP2:
EXT:
Flags
Stack pointer SP1
Stack pointer SP2
EXT register
QUEUE: QUEUE register
bus cycle: Execution cycle counter
[xxxx]:
Watch data at four locations
∗ If the memory locations indicated by the X and Y registers are in an unused area, the data in that area
is marked by an "∗" as it is displayed.
Note that watch data is always displayed even if it resides in an unused area (indeterminate).
(2) When [Register] window is opened
When the [Register] window is opened, all the above contents are displayed in the [Register] window
according to the program execution. When you use the rd command, the displayed contents of the
[Register] window is updated.
(3) When [Register] window is closed
Data is displayed in the [Command] window in the following manner:
>rd↵
PC:0110 A:A B:A X:[AAAA] = * Y:[AAAA] = * EICZ:0000 SP1:AA SP2:AA EXT:AA
QUEUE:AAAA bus cycle:000002AB3D cycle
[0000] = 0000 [0010] = AAAA [0014] = AAAA [0018] = AAAA
>
(4) During log output
If a command execution result is being output to a log file by the log command, the register values are
displayed in the [Command] window even if the [Register] window is opened and are also output to
the log file.
GUI utility
[View | Register] menu item
When this menu item is selected, the [Register] window opens or becomes active and displays the
current register contents.
174
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
rs (register set)
Function
This command modifies the register values.
Format
(1) >rs <register> <value> [<register> <value> [...<register> <value>]]↵ (direct input mode)
(2) >rs↵ (guidance mode)
PC = Old value : <value>↵
A = Old value : <value>↵
B = Old value : <value>↵
X = Old value : <value>↵
Y = Old value : <value>↵
FE = Old value : <value>↵
F I = Old value : <value>↵
FC = Old value : <value>↵
FZ = Old value : <value>↵
SP1 = Old value : <value>↵
SP2 = Old value : <value>↵
EXT = Old value : <value>↵
Q = Old value : <value>↵
>
<register>: Register name (PC, A, B, X, Y, F, SP1, SP2, EXT, Q)
<value>: Value to be set to the register; hexadecimal
Examples
Format (1)
>rs pc 110 f 0↵
... Sets PC to 0x0110 and resets all the flags.
Format (2)
>rs↵
PC= 116: 110↵
A= 0: f↵
B= 0: ↵
X= 0: 100↵
Y= 0: 100↵
FE= 0: ↵
FI= 0: ↵
FC= 1: 0↵
FZ= 1: 0↵
SP1= aa: ff↵
SP2= aa: ff↵
EXT= 0: ↵
Q= 0: ↵
When a register is modified, the [Register] window is updated to show the contents you have input. If
you input "q↵" to stop entering in the middle, the contents input up to that time are updated.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
175
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
Notes
• An error results if you input a value exceeding the register's bit width.
Error : invalid value
• An error results if you input a register name other than PC, A, B, X, Y, F, SP1, SP2, EXT or Q in direct
input mode.
Error : Incorrect register name, use PC/A/B/X/Y/F/SP1/SP2/EXT/Q
• In guidance mode, the following keyboard inputs have special meaning:
"q↵"
"^↵"
"↵"
… Command is terminated. (finish inputting and start execution)
… Return to previous register.
… Input is skipped. (keep current value)
GUI utility
[Register] window
The [Register] window allows direct modification of data. Click the [Register] window, select the
displayed data to be modified and enter a value then press [Enter].
176
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.9.7 Program Execution
g (go)
Function
This command executes the target program from the current PC position.
Format
>g [<address1> [<address2>]]↵
<address1–2>: Temporary break addresses; hexadecimal or symbol (IEEE-695 format only)
Condition: 0 ≤ address1(2) ≤ last program memory address
(direct input mode)
Operation
(1) Program execution
The target program is executed from the address indicated by the PC. Program execution is continued
until it is made to break for one of the following causes:
• The set break condition is met
• The [Key Break] button is clicked or the [Esc] key is pressed
• A map break, etc., occurs
If a temporary break is specified, the program execution will be suspended before executing the
instruction at the specified address. Up to two temporary break addresses can be specified.
>g 1a0↵
... Executes the program from the current PC address to address 0x1a0.
When program execution breaks, the system stands by waiting for a command input after displaying
a break status message. When you hit the [Enter] key here, program execution is resumed beginning
with a PC address next to the break address. Temporary break address settings are also valid.
(2) Window display by program execution
In the initial debugger settings, the on-the-fly function is turned on.
During program execution, the PC, flags and watch data contents in the [Register] window are
updated in real time every 0.5 seconds (default) by the on-the-fly function. If the [Register] window is
closed, the above contents are displayed in the [Command] window. The on-the-fly function can be
turned off by the otf command. In this case, the [Register] window is updated after a break.
The [Source] window is updated after a break in such a way that the break address is displayed
within the window.
If the [Trace] window is opened, the display contents are cleared as the program is executed. It is
updated with the new trace information after a break.
If the [Data] window is opened, the display contents are updated after a break.
(3) Display during log mode
If the program is executed after turning on the log mode, an on-the-fly display appears in the [Com-
mand] window as well as the [Register] window.
Example:
>g
PC:0007 EICZ:0001 [0000] = AAAA [0004] = 3D30 [0008] = AAAA [000C] = AAAA
PC:000C EICZ:0000 [0000] = AAAA [0004] = 5250 [0008] = AAAA [000C] = AAAA
PC:0117 EICZ:1001 [0000] = AAAA [0004] = 6760 [0008] = AAAA [000C] = AAAA
PC:000B EICZ:0000 [0000] = AAAA [0004] = 8C70 [0008] = AAAA [000C] = AAAA
Key Break
PC:0008 A:F B:1 X:[0007] = 0 Y:[AAAA] = * EICZ:1001 SP1:4A(128) SP2:1F EXT:00
QUEUE:0118 bus cycle:0000029332 cycle [0000] = AAAA [0004] = E280 [0008] = AAAA
[000C] = AAAA
>
When a break occurs, the same display appears as when data is displayed by the rd command.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
177
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
(4) Execution cycle counter
The execution cycle counter displayed in the [Register] window indicates the number of cycles
executed or the execution time of the target program. (Refer to Section 8.8.4 for details.)
In the initial debugger settings, the execution cycle counter is set to hold mode so that execution time
is added up until the CPU is reset. If this mode is changed to reset mode by the md command, the
execution cycle counter is cleared to 0 each time the g command is executed. The counter is also reset
simultaneously when execution is restarted by hitting the [Enter] key.
Notes
• If a break condition is met, program execution is suspended and the PC will be set to the program
address at the breakpoint.
• The address you specified must be within the range of the program memory area available with each
microcomputer model.
An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or a valid symbol.
Error : invalid value
(no such symbol / symbol type error)
An error results if the limit is exceeded.
Error : Address out of range, use 0-0xXXXX
GUI utility
[Run | Go] menu item, [Go] button
When this menu item or button is selected, the g command without temporary break is executed.
[Go] button
[Run | Go to Cursor] menu item, [Go to Cursor] button
When this menu item or button is selected after placing the cursor to the temporary break address line
in the [Source] window, the g command with a temporary break is executed. The program execution
will be suspended after executing the address at the cursor position.
[Go to Cursor] button
178
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
gr (go after reset CPU)
Function
This command executes the target program from the boot address after resetting the CPU.
Format
>gr [<address1> [<address2>]]↵
<address1–2>: Temporary break addresses; hexadecimal or symbol (IEEE-695 format only)
Condition: 0 ≤ address1(2) ≤ last program memory address
(direct input mode)
Operation
This command resets the CPU before executing the program. This causes the PC to be set at address
0x0110, from which the command starts executing the program.
Once the program starts executing, the command operates in the same way as the g command, except
that the gr command does not support the function for restarting execution by hitting the [Enter] key.
Refer to the explanation of the g command for more information.
Notes
• If a break condition is met, program execution is suspended and the PC will be set to the program
address at the breakpoint.
• The address you specified must be within the range of the program memory area available with each
microcomputer model.
An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or a valid symbol.
Error : invalid value
(no such symbol / symbol type error)
An error results if the limit is exceeded.
Error : Address out of range, use 0-0xXXXX
GUI utility
[Run | Go from Reset] menu item, [Go from Reset] button
When this menu item or button is selected, the gr command is executed.
[Go from Reset] button
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
179
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
s (step)
Function
This command single-steps the target program from the current PC position by executing one instruc-
tion at a time.
Format
>s [<step>]↵
(direct input mode)
<step>:
Number of steps to be executed; decimal (default is 1)
Condition: 0 ≤ step ≤ 65,535
Operation
(1) Step execution
If the <step> is omitted, only the program step at the address indicated by the PC is executed, other-
wise the specified number of program steps is executed from the address indicated by the PC.
>s↵
>s 20↵
...Executes one step at the current PC address.
...Executes 20 steps from the current PC address.
The program execution is suspended by the following cause even before the specified number of steps
is completed.
• The [Key Break] button is clicked or the [Esc] key is pressed
• A map break, etc. occurs
After each step is completed, the register contents in the [Register] window are updated. If the
[Register] window is closed, the register contents are displayed in the [Command] window same as
executing the rd command.
When program execution is completed by stepping through instructions, the system stands by
waiting for command input. If you hit the [Enter] key here, the system single-steps the program in the
same way again.
(2) HALT and SLEEP states and interrupts
When the halt or slp instruction is executed, the CPU is placed in standby mode. An interrupt is
required to clear this mode. The debugger has a mode to enable or disable an external interrupt for
use in a single-step operation.
Enable mode
Disable mode
External interrupt
Interrupt is processed.
Interrupt is not processed.
The halt and slp instructions are
replaced with a nop instruction as
the instruction is executed.
halt and slp instructions
Executed as the halt instruction.
Processing is continued by an
external interrupt or clicking on
the [Key Break] button.
In the initial settings, the debugger is set to the interrupt disable mode.
The interrupt enable mode can also be set by using the md command.
(3) Execution cycle counter
The execution cycle counter displayed in the [Register] window indicates the number of cycles
executed or the execution time of the target program.
In the initial debugger settings, the execution cycle counter is set to hold mode so that execution time
is added up until the CPU is reset. If this mode is changed to reset mode by the md command, the
execution cycle counter is cleared to 0 each time the s command is executed. The counter is also reset
simultaneously when execution is restarted by hitting the [Enter] key.
180
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
(4) During log mode
If the program is single-stepped after turning on the log mode, the same contents as when executing
the rd command are displayed in the [Command] window after each step is completed.
Notes
• The step count must be specified within the range of 0 to 65,535. An error results if the limit is ex-
ceeded.
Error : Number of steps out of range, use 0-65535
• If the [Data] window is opened, its display contents are updated after the execution.
• During a single-step operation, the program will not break even if the break condition set by a
command is met.
• Unlike in successive executions (g or gr command), the [Register] window is updated every time a
step is executed.
GUI utility
[Run | Step] menu item, [Step] button
When this menu item or button is selected, the s command without step count is executed.
[Step] button
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
181
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
n (next)
Function
This command single-steps the target program from the current PC position by executing one instruc-
tion at a time.
Format
>n [<step>]↵
(direct input mode)
<step>:
Number of steps to be executed; decimal (default is 1)
Condition: 0 ≤ step ≤ 65,535
Operation
This command basically operates in the same way as the s command.
However, the calr, calz and int instructions, including all subroutines until control returns to the next
address, are executed as one step.
Notes
• The step count must be specified within the range of 0 to 65,535. An error results if the limit is ex-
ceeded.
Error : Number of steps out of range, use 0-65535
• If the [Data] window is opened, its display contents are updated after the execution.
• During a single-step operation, the program will not break even if the break condition set by a
command is met.
• Unlike in successive executions (g or gr command), the [Register] window is updated every time a
step is executed.
GUI utility
[Run | Next] menu item, [Next] button
When this menu item or button is selected, the n command without step count is executed.
[Next] button
182
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.9.8 CPU Reset
rst (reset CPU)
Function
This command resets the CPU.
Format
>rst↵
Notes
• The registers and flags are set as follows:
(direct input mode)
PC:
A:
0110
A
B:
A
X:
Y:
EICZ:
SP1:
SP2:
EXT:
AAAA
AAAA
0000
AA
AA
AA
QUEUE: AAAA
• The execution cycle counter is cleared to 0.
• If the [Source] window is open, the window is redisplayed beginning with address 0x0110. If the
[Register] window is open, the window is redisplayed with the above contents.
• The debug status, such as memory contents, breaks, and trace, is not reset.
GUI utility
[Run | Reset CPU] menu item, [Reset] button
When this menu item or button is selected, the rst command is executed.
[Reset] button
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
183
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
8.9.9 Break
bp (break point set)
Function
This command sets or clears breakpoints using a program's execution address.
Format
(1) >bp <break1> [<break2> [ ... <break16>]]↵
(direct input mode)
(guidance mode)
(2) >bp↵
PC break set status
1. set 2. clear 3. clear all ... ? <1 | 2 | 3>↵
.......... (guidance depends on the above selection, see examples)
>
<break1–16>: Break address; hexadecimal or symbol (IEEE-695 format only)
Condition:
0 ≤ address ≤ last program memory address
Examples
Format (1)
>bp 116 200↵
... Sets break points at addresses 0x0116 and 0x0200.
* The direct input mode cannot clear the set break points.
Format (2)
>bp↵
(Set)
No PC break is set.
1. set 2. clear 3. clear all ...? 1↵
Set break address ? : 116↵
Set break address ? : 200↵
Set break address ? : ↵
... "1. set" is selected.
... Address 0x0116 is set as a breakpoint.
... Address 0x0200 is set as a breakpoint.
... Terminated by [Enter] key.
>bp↵
(Clear)
1: 0116
2: 0200
1. set 2. clear 3. clear all ...? 2↵
... "2. clear" is selected.
... Break address 0x0200 is cleared.
... Terminated by [Enter] key.
Clear break address ? : 200↵
Clear break address ? : ↵
>bp↵
(Clear all)
1: 0116
1. set 2. clear 3. clear all ...? 3↵
... "3. clear all" is selected.
... Terminated by [Enter] key.
>bp↵
No PC break is set.
1. set 2. clear 3. clear all ...? ↵
>
Notes
• The addresses must be specified within the range of the program memory area available for each
microcomputer model.
An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or a valid symbol.
Error : invalid value
(no such symbol / symbol type error)
An error results if the limit is exceeded.
Error : Address out of range, use 0-0xXXXX
• An error results if you attempt to clear an address that has not been set.
Error : Input address does not exist
• For direct input mode, an error results if you attempt to set breakpoints at more than 16 locations at a
time. But for guidance mode, there is no such limitation, so you can specify more than 16 breakpoints
before terminating the command by the [Enter] key.
• You can use this command for multiple times to set new breakpoints.
184
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
GUI utility
[Break | Breakpoint Set...] menu item
When this menu item is selected, a dialog box appears for setting breakpoints.
To set a breakpoint, select a [Set] button and
enter an address in the text box corresponding
to the selected button.
When setting more than four breakpoints, click
the [Next] button to continue settings.
The [Previous] and [Next] buttons are used to
view previous and subsequent four
breakpoints.
To clear a breakpoint, select the [Clear] button
of the address to be cleared.
The [Clear All Breakpoint] button clears all the
set breakpoints
[Break] button
When this button is clicked after placing the cursor to a line in the [Source] window, the address at the
cursor position is set as a breakpoint. If the address has been set as a breakpoint, this button clears the
breakpoint.
[Break] button
The set breakpoints are marked with a ● at the beginning of the address lines in the [Source] window.
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
EPSON
185
CHAPTER 8: DEBUGGER
bc / bpc (break point clear)
Function
This command clears the specified breakpoints that have been set.
Format
>bc [<break1> [ . . .<break16>]]↵
(direct input mode)
<break1–16>: Break address; hexadecimal or symbol (IEEE-695 format only)
Examples
>bp↵
1: 0116
2: 0200
3: 0260
... Breakpoints that have been set.
1. set 2. clear 3. clear all ...? ↵
>bc 200↵
... Clears breakpoints at address 0x0200.
>bp↵
1: 0116
2: 0260
1. set 2. clear 3. clear all ...? ↵
>bc↵
... Clears all breakpoints.
>bp↵
No PC break is set.
1. set 2. clear 3. clear all ...? ↵
>
Notes
• The bc and bpc commands have the same functions.
• If no address parameter is specified, all the breakpoints that have been set are cleared.
• The format of parameters is same as the bp command. You can also use the guidance input mode of bp
command to do the same operation.
• You can use this command for multiple times to clear breakpoints.
• An error results if an address that is not set at a breakpoint is specified.
Error : Input address does not exist
GUI utility
[Break | Breakpoint Set …] menu item
When this menu item is selected, a dialog box appears for clearing breakpoints. (See the bp com-
mand.)
[Break] button
When this button is clicked after placing the cursor to a break address line in the [Source] window, the
breakpoint is cleared. If the address has not been set as a breakpoint, this button sets a new breakpoint
at the address.
[Break] button
186
EPSON
S5U1C63000A MANUAL
(S1C63 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE)
|